JP2017086641A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine of the invention can execute in parallel, a variable display of a first pattern which is executed based on a determination result of determination information acquired based on ball entry to a first start port, and a variable display of a second pattern which is executed based on a determination result of a random number acquired based on ball entry to a second start port. The game machine is configured so that, when the variable display of the first pattern which becomes the failure is started during the variable display of the second pattern in which a small winning game is executed, and when the variable display of the second pattern is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the first pattern, the variable display of the first pattern is stopped and displayed, even when a variation time of the first pattern does not pass.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a variation display of a symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball at a starting port, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when the variation display becomes a special result. Things are common.

  Among such gaming machines, there is one that controls to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the advantager than the normal gaming state after the end of the special game (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-158541 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that the relationship of the variable display executed in parallel is not interesting and the game is not interesting.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a first acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the first starting area, and a game based on the determination information acquired by the first acquisition means. A first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a person, and a variation display of the first symbol in any of a plurality of variation times based on a determination result by the first determination means. Based on the first variation display means, second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the game ball entering the second starting area, and the determination information acquired by the second acquisition means, the special game is displayed. Second determination means for determining whether or not to execute, second variation display means for performing variation display of the second symbol in any of a plurality of variation times based on the determination result by the second determination means, Variation display of the first symbol or variation variation of the second symbol Special game execution means for executing the special game when a special result is obtained, the first symbol variation display by the first variation display means, and the second symbol variation display by the second variation display means. Can be executed in parallel, and the special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more disadvantageous than the first special game, and the first variation display means includes the second special game The variation display of the first symbol is started during the variation display of the second symbol to be executed. The variation display of the second symbol is stopped and displayed during the variation display of the first symbol. In this case, even if the variation time of the first symbol has not elapsed, the variation display of the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table for jackpots, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table for jackpots, (c) is the special symbol determination table for losers It is a figure which shows an example. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for 1st special symbols in a normal gaming state, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for 1st special symbols in a high probability gaming state It is. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for 2nd special symbols in a normal gaming state, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for 2nd special symbols in a high probability gaming state It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table for 1st special symbols. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big prize opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the hit determination table for normal symbols, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol determination table for normal symbols, (c) is the variation pattern determination for normal symbols It is a figure which shows an example of a table, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the open mode determination table of a 2nd starting port. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure determination information storage area of main RAM, (b) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a special figure determination information storage area, (c) is a figure of main RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure determination information storage area, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a common figure determination information storage area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special figure special electricity control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st special figure special electricity control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd big hit determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the common figure normal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game process in a main control board. It is a timing chart in case the losing fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is started after the start of the losing fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol. It is a timing chart in case the loss variation display of the 2nd special symbol is started after the start of the big hit variation display of the 1st special symbol. It is a timing chart in case the forced loss variation display of the 2nd special symbol is started after the start of the big hit variation display of the 1st special symbol. It is a timing chart in case the losing fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is started after the start of the losing fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol. It is a timing chart when the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started after the big hit variation display or the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is started. It is a timing chart in case the forced loss variation display of the 1st special symbol is started after the start of the big hit variation display of the 2nd special symbol. It is a timing chart when the big hit variation display of the 1st special symbol is started after the start of the small hit variation display of the 2nd special symbol. It is a timing chart in case the losing fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol and the losing fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol are started simultaneously. It is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously. It is a timing chart when the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the big hit variation display or the small hit variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously. It is a timing chart when the forced loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously. It is a timing chart when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously. It is a figure which shows the command classification transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the command classification transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the emission alerting | reporting control process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 1 in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of production in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 3 in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of production in a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 4 in a high probability game state.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 supported to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 supported to be rotatable with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 in which a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

  The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is attached to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a stopper). ) Is fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the first hinge mechanism portion 6. Has been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 Maintenance can be performed.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Yes. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 including a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a ball, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not flowed into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into an overflow ball channel described later, and a game ball A firing operation device 13 capable of performing an operation for firing is provided.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at intervals in two upper portions of the glass frame 4 so as to produce an effect by sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. It has become. Also, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8 and produce an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled so as to be lit / flashed when a glass ball 4 is opened or a payout abnormality in which a game ball cannot be paid out from the game ball payout device 100 occurs. Yes.

  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage unit 11 a is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11 b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  Further, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 and 2) functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects, which will be described later, are provided on the center front side portion of the upper tray 11. Are arranged side by side.

  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (see FIG. 2) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 4) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 4) having a button drive motor for moving the button 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 is connected to the cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation and the cross key 19, and A cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) for detecting an operation on the game machine 1 is provided so that a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, a lending operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation for game balls and a return operation for a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are lent by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1; When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path. The full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. While this is being done, game ball payout by a game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects that a player's hand touches the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 4), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 4) composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A light emitting device 15c is provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to send out the game balls one by one.

  The light emitting device 15c of the handle is formed in a dome shape that constitutes a front portion of the firing handle 15 and bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. It is installed. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (for example, a final effect for notifying that a big hit game is generated) that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. In addition, an air blowing port 15d serving as a blow-out port for wind (air) sent out from an air blowing device 21 described later is provided at the front end of the light emitting device 15c of the handle.

  On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 (see FIG. 4) for sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner to a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 is provided. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for sending out wind (air) and a motor (not shown) for operating the blower, and wind (air) sent out by the blower Is sent through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the light emitting device 15c of the handle toward the player's hand from the air blowing port 15d. By operating this blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blowing effect (such as the above-mentioned confirmed effect) that sends wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15. It has become.

  The air blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 so that wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. A plurality of blower devices 21 may be provided.

  The game board mounting frame 3 has a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 (see FIG. 4) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board mounting. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape having a front opening at a substantial center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are located behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

  The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the launching member 28, and an upward movement from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined launch rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position that is the lower end of the launch rail are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when it is rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball fired by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

  Near the center of the game area 5a, a so-called center case is provided with a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the interior, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. In addition, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5 a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and the decoration frame 40 is provided below the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game ball introduced into the interior of the sphere so as to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

  Below the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (win) are provided at intervals. When the game balls that have won (entered) are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

  In the right area (right game area) of the game area 5a, there is provided a general figure gate 44 (normal figure start area) through which a game ball can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the general figure gate 44 detects the gate. When detected by the switch 44a (see FIG. 4), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. The normal symbol winning lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 45 (special drawing start region) through which a game ball can always win (enter) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42. When a game ball that has won (entered) a ball is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are received from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Downward from the general gate 44, the game ball wins from the closed state (basic mode) where the game ball can not be won (win) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of the special symbol jackpot lottery) A first variable winning portion 49 is provided that is converted into an open state (special mode) in which a ball can be entered.

  The first variable winning section 49 includes a first grand prize winning port 50 through which a game ball can win (win) and a first ball for detecting a game ball winning (winning) in the first big prize winning port 50. A big prize opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 4), a first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 that converts (variably) the first big prize opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a first big prize opening opening / closing member 51. And a first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing conversion. When the first grand prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the first big prize opening 50 is in the open state, Winning (entering) is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the first grand prize opening 50 is detected by the first big prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, ten) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (FIG. 3) to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball.

  Directly below the first start opening 45, a game ball wins from a closed state (basic mode) in which a game ball cannot be won (win) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a special symbol jackpot lottery). A second variable winning portion 52 that is converted into an open state (special mode) in which (entering) is possible is provided.

  The second variable winning portion 52 includes a second grand prize opening 53 through which a game ball can win (win) and a second ball for detecting a game ball winning (winning) in the second big prize opening 53. A prize winning opening detection switch 53a (see FIG. 4), a second prize winning opening / closing member 54 for converting (variable) the second prize winning opening 53 into a closed state and an open state, and a second prize winning opening / closing member 54 And a second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 54b. When the second big prize opening 53 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second big prize opening 53 is in the open state, Winning (entering) is possible or easy.

  Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second big prize opening 53 is detected by the second big prize opening detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, five balls) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (FIG. 3) to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball.

  Between the first variable prize winning portion 49 and the second variable prize winning portion 52, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the fact that a lottery for a normal symbol is won). A variable starter 46 is provided that is converted from a state (basic mode) to a winning state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (entered).

  The variable starter 46 detects a second start port 47 (special drawing start region) in which a game ball can win (pick up) and a game ball win (win) in the second start port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second start port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start port opening / closing solenoid that converts the movable member 48 to open / close. 48b (see FIG. 4). When the second start port 47 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the second start port 47 is open, the game ball wins ( Is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second start port 47 is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). ) To be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a big win lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Note that the game ball fired in the left area (left game area) of the game area 5a flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage unit 42. , Either one of the three general winning ports 43, the first starting port 45 and the second large winning port 53 provided in the left region will be won or will flow into the out port 39. Therefore, no winning (passing) is made to the ordinary gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first big winning opening 50 and the second starting opening 47 provided in the right region.

  In addition, the game ball fired to the right area (right game area) of the game area 5a flows down as it is along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows down after passing the usual gate 44, and is provided in the right area. Either one of the general winning ports 43, the first grand winning port 50, the second starting port 47, and the second large winning port 53 is won or flows into the out port 39. Therefore, no winning is made in the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left region.

  On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening 53 are awarded and the general winning opening detecting switch 43 a, A winning ball flow path for receiving and collecting the game balls detected by the first starting port detecting switch 45a, the second starting port detecting switch 47a, the first big winning port detecting switch 50a and the second large winning port detecting switch 53a. Is provided. The game balls that have passed through the winning ball flow path are discharged from the discharge port on the back side of the gaming machine 1 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (island facilities).

  Outside the gaming area 5a, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61 and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, and a second special symbol hold A hold display device comprising a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special game) described below A right-handed indicator 67 that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a during the state) or high probability game state is provided.

  The first special symbol display 60 is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying) the result of jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol display 61 displays (notifies) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second start port 47. The normal symbol display unit 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that a game ball wins (wins) a ball on the normal gate 44. It is a vessel.

  The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot determination random value or the like (determination information) obtained when a game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45, and the acquired jackpot determination random number value and jackpot This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is called. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) obtained when a game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47, and the jackpot determination random number value and jackpot This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing the determination value. When the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays a variation of the second special symbol, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped. Is called. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at a predetermined interval or order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a big hit mode, a small hit mode, or a lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

  In the present embodiment, “big hit” means that a big hit game (special game state) is executed in the big special lottery (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the big special lottery (special game determination) of the second special symbol. The state where the rights have been acquired. “Occasion game (special game state)” means that a round game in which the big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening) is opened in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 4 times) , 8 times, 16 times, etc.).

  In addition, although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53) in each round game are determined in advance, before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, six) are won (entered) in the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53), one round game is finished. In other words, the “hit game (special game state)” is a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

  Whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is “winning” by obtaining a random number value for hit determination when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 and comparing the acquired random number value for hit determination with the hit determination value This corresponds to determining whether or not. When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the normal symbol display unit 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a winning mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, “winning” means a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a normal symbol winning lottery. The “winning game (auxiliary game)” means a gaming state in which the second start port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Note that the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second start opening 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are determined in advance, but even before reaching the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time, When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) wins (wins), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the “winning game (auxiliary game)” is in a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easy to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is easily established). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot lottery (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) that is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. In addition, although a maximum of four first reserved memories are stored, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

  The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol of the second special symbol is stored when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47). This is for displaying the number of rights (second hold storage) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the second hold storage. Note that up to four second reserved memories are stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or the second reserved memory may not be stored in the first place. .

  The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a right to perform a lottery drawing (normal symbol variation display) of a normal symbol stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (general hold storage), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of general hold storage. Note that up to four general-purpose hold memories may be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or the general-purpose hold memory may not be stored in the first place. .

  The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, if a special symbol jackpot lottery is won, “7” is stopped and “−” is stopped if it is lost. It is recommended to repeat “ Note that before the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, the previous variable display stop result is displayed by turning on the LED. Therefore, when the variable display starts, the variable display is started by turning off the LED. It becomes easy to grasp that it has started.

  A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) comprising a liquid crystal display having a size and display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. Is provided with a change notification LED 58 for notifying that a change display of a special symbol is being executed on the right side of the effect space 40a. The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are used as the first display device (first display means) and the second display device (second display means) of this embodiment. Equivalent to.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) display various effects as the game progresses. As the effect display, the first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b executed when the customer waiting effect or the special symbol change display is performed when the special symbol change display is not performed. Fluctuation display, a sign effect by a character, a notice effect, and the like. It is also possible to replace the effect symbol with effect identification information.

  In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays a solenoid or a motor during execution of variable display of the first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by means of a panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 4) constituted by, for example.

  Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to (below) the end of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and closer to the center (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving in the vertical direction (up and down) with respect to the effect position (second position) located at. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first variable display area for displaying three first effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), A second variable display area for displaying one second effect symbol 70b, a mode display area indicating the current effect mode, and the like are formed.

  The first effect symbol 70a is composed of symbols indicating numbers from “1” to “8”, for example, and corresponds to the start of variable display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60. Then, the variable display is started, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The second effect symbol 70b is composed of symbols such as “red ○”, “blue ○”, “green ○”, “yellow ○”, “black ○”, “white ○”, “−”, etc., and the second special symbol display. The variable display starts corresponding to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol executed by the device 61, and the stop display is performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. As the first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b, symbols indicating alphabets such as “A” to “F” may be used.

  In the stop display of the first effect symbol 70a, the first effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same first stage design 70a such as “777” or a combination of the first stage design 70a having regularity such as “357”. Are other embodiments.

  In the stop display of the second effect symbol 70b, the second effect symbol 70b is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, small hit mode, big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The big hit mode (special result mode) is the second stage design 70b such as “red ○”, “blue ○”, “green ○”, “yellow ○”, “black ○”, etc. The second effect symbol 70b such as “white ○” is a symbol such as “−”.

  Note that the variation display mode of the first effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or may be switching or rotation (spinning) on the spot. May be. Further, the variation display mode of the second effect symbol 70b is switching on the spot, but may be scrolling in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, or may be rotation (spinning).

  Further, during the variable display of the first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main Displayed on the liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) increases the player's expectation for occurrence of a big hit (special game state).

  On the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), first hold icons for displaying the number of first hold icons corresponding to the number of first special figure hold (U1) that is the current number of first hold memories. A display area 71C, a second hold icon display area 71D for displaying the number of second hold icons corresponding to the number of second special figure hold (U2) that is the current number of second hold memories, The variation icon display area 71E for displaying the variation icon TH corresponding to (related to) the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) is formed.

  The first hold icon display area 71C is partitioned in the form of a first display part 71C1, a second display part 71C2, a third display part 71C3, and a fourth display part 71C4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 71E. Each display unit 71C1 to 71C4 displays a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1).

  Specifically, the first display unit 71C1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, and the second display unit 71C2 displays the second hold The first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the third display portion 71C3, and the first special symbol variable display is executed third. A first hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display portion 71C4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

  The second hold icon display area 71D is partitioned from the left in the form of a first display unit 71D1, a second display unit 71D2, a third display unit 71D3, a fourth display unit 71D4, and the display units 71D1 to 71D4 have The number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed.

  Specifically, the first display unit 71D1 displays a second on-hold icon indicating the second on-hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 71D2 displays the second on-hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the second display, and the second display of the second special symbol variation is executed on the third display portion 71D3. A second on-hold icon indicating the on-hold storage is displayed, and a second on-hold icon indicating the second on-hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 71D4.

  The variation icon display area 71E is formed immediately above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 71C and the second hold icon display area 71D, and rides on this pedestal image, or The variation icon is displayed so as to float.

  Specifically, the first hold icon displayed on the first display portion 71C1 of the first hold icon display area 71C moves (shifts) with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first effect symbol 70a). ), The variation icon is displayed, and the variation icon disappears (erases) at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol (first effect symbol 70a). In addition, you may make the said fluctuation | variation icon disappear in the middle of the fluctuation | variation display of the special symbol (effect | design symbol 70a).

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) performs the variable display of the first effect design 70a and the second effect design 70b, but the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). ), The first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b may be displayed in a variable manner, or the first effect display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) are used as the first effect. It is also possible to perform variable display of the symbol 70a and perform variable display of the second effect symbol 70b on the other hand.

  The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by a panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 6) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, or the like.

  Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by emitting a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) with a predetermined light emission color according to the progress state of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. In addition, it is positioned near the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and near the center (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A moving effect is performed by moving (up and down) in the vertical direction between the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17. FIG.

  The fluctuation notification LED 58 is configured by a full color LED, and is provided with a first fluctuation notification LED 58a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second fluctuation notification LED 58b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first change notification LED 58a starts the color change in response to the start of the change display of the first special symbol, and stops the color change in response to the stop of the change display of the first special symbol. Whether or not one special symbol is variably displayed is notified. The second change notification LED 58b starts changing the color in response to the start of the change display of the second special symbol, and stops changing the color in response to the stop of the change display of the second special symbol. Whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed is notified.

  The back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 is supplied from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), island facilities, and the like. A game ball storage unit 101 that stores and supplies game balls to the game ball payout device 100, a main control device 110A that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a payout from the main control board 110 Built-in payout control device 120A including a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to the control command, and effect control board 130 for controlling the effect according to the effect control command from the main control board 110 Game information (game signal) is output to the outside of the effect control device 130A, the power supply device 160A incorporating the power supply board 160 for supplying the power supply voltage to the various control devices, and the gaming machine. Game information output terminal board 90 and the like of the eye are provided.

  There is also provided an open / close door-type cover member 23 that opens and closes the left and right other sides in the left and right directions around a rotation axis set on the left and right sides so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume of effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10, panel illumination device). 74) is provided with a changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the luminance adjustment.

  The changeover switch 22 can be operated by a store clerk by opening the cover member 23, but the player is covered by the cover member 32 on the back side of the gaming machine 1. The operation unit is provided at a position where operation by is impossible or difficult. In addition, the entire structure is covered with the cover member 23 so that the game ball dropped from the island facility does not collide or is erroneously operated when checking the gaming machine. Instead, the upper portion may be simply covered with a member such as a bag in consideration of operability. Further, the bag may be formed by a part of the board box of the effect control device 130A.

  Further, the change-over switch 22 may be provided on the front side of the game board mounting frame or on the back side of the glass frame 4 so that the store clerk of the game shop can operate when the glass frame 4 is opened. May be provided at a position that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by a store clerk and / or a player and is more difficult to operate than the cross key 19, for example, at the top or side of the glass frame 4. .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that is a work area during the arithmetic processing (corresponding to volatile storage means). 110 m, and an input port and an output port for main control. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled device (various solenoids and various displays). Or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The input port of the main control board 110 includes a general winning port detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting port detecting switch 45a, a second starting port detecting switch 47a, a first large winning port detecting switch 50a, and a second large port. A prize opening detection switch 53a, a magnetic detection sensor 55a, a radio wave detection sensor 56a, a RAM clear switch 57a, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a first large winning port opening / closing solenoid 51b, a second large winning port opening / closing solenoid 54b, a first special symbol display 60, and a second special symbol display. 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Via the output port, drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, game information notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer), etc. Is output.

  The payout control board 120 is a subordinate control board that controls the payout of the game ball and controls the release of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the release of the game ball.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during the calculation processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, thereby playing the game ball The payout device 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121 are an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101, and the like. The payout motor 100 b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

  When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a performs the control. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out the game balls is terminated.

  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a launch volume 15b are connected to the input port of the launch control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b and a launch solenoid 28b of the game ball launch device 26 are connected to an output port of the launch control unit 122. It is connected.

  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized and fired. When it is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is set so that the firing intensity according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is obtained. The game ball is fired by driving 28b.

  The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A by rotating the rotating shaft. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for 1 minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls an effect related to the game (performed on the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal display), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button drive device 17b, and blower device 21 A lamp control unit 150 for controlling the panel lighting device 74, the panel driving device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control (subordinate control means, display control means, image display means, effect Equivalent to execution means).

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, performs the processing related to the presentation while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, and receives the command received from the main control board 110. In response to detection signals (input signals) from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( Output data and commands).

  An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the detection signal is performed.

  Upon receiving a command from the effect control unit 130m, the display control unit 140 performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 is controlled to output predetermined audio or sound.

  The display control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, a liquid crystal control unit 141 that includes an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a VDP (Video Display) as an image processor. A VRAM 147 having an image control unit 145 including a processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, and a frame buffer provided in the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. And an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like, an input / output port to which the audio output device 9, the changeover switch 22 and the like are connected.

  The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs computation processing related to the presentation while using the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving the presentation control unit 130m. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, control (such as data or command output) for causing the image control unit 145 or the audio control unit 148 to execute various effects, or an audio signal in response to a detection signal from the cross key detection switch 19a. Volume value of sound / sound to be output from the output device 9 (volume value 1: volume 20%, volume value 2: volume 40%, volume value 3: volume 60%, volume value 4: volume 80%, volume value 5: 100%) and control for changing the luminance (luminance value) of the image display device and various lamps / LEDs.

  The general ROM 143 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands, and an animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns and animation scene information are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. In addition, various information such as a duty ratio, which is a luminance parameter of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored, and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) is generated. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image, a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol, and a character This is material data representing individual images such as images and serif images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 146 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 146 compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in units of image data by the image controller 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 146 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (the overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Has a frame buffer area corresponding to.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

  Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) converts the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 into the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). The drawing data is read out from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and Various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  Note that an operation clock is supplied from the crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 are divided by dividing the operation clock. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with (sub liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

  Further, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it between the image controller 145 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Is connected. The general-purpose substrate 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) that display image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between connecting a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) .

  The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on the various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE) and the like from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Control for causing a controlled device such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined performance is performed (data and commands are output) in accordance with the received instruction command.

  The input / output port of the lamp control unit is connected to the frame illumination device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel illumination device 74, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the lighting device 10, the lighting device 15 for the frame, the light emitting device 15 c for the handle, and the lighting control for various LEDs of the panel lighting device 74, etc. An operation effect (the above-described movement effect) is performed by performing drive control of a drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel drive device 75.

  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power supply is used for the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, It is supplied to an effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power interruption (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power interruption detection signal 162 to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power interruption (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure).

  In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state for supplying main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch (corresponding to the state switching means) is provided so that it can be operated by a store clerk of the game store. When the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

  The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power interruption detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized. When a power interruption (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the game control state is restored to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, “low probability gaming state” and “high probability gaming state” are included as states related to the special symbol jackpot drawing. Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low probability gaming state”, and this gaming state is referred to as a “normal gaming state” in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that the winning probability of jackpot in the jackpot lottery of special symbols performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 For example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1 / 99.9. On the other hand, the “high probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to be, for example, 1 / 52.6. . Therefore, in the “high probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low probability gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after all the jackpot games are finished, the low-probability gaming state is changed to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period (for example, until 50 special symbol variation displays are executed), the high-probability gaming is performed. The state is shifted to the low probability gaming state. It should be noted that the low probability gaming state is not shifted to the high probability gaming state after the small hitting game is ended, and the low probability gaming state is set during the big hit gaming.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to generate a jackpot. Specifically, FIG. 5A shows a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol referred to in the jackpot determination (lottery) executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first start opening 45. FIG. 5B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol which is referred to in the jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. is there. In the tables of FIG. 5 (a) and FIG. 5 (b), the big hit probability in each gaming state is the same, but in the table of FIG. 5 (a), no big hit occurs, whereas in FIG. 5 (b) Small hits are generated at the table.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state and when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. The jackpot determination random value (determination information) in the acquired special figure determination information is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 5 (a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b), and the current probability gaming state is acquired. Based on the jackpot determination random number value, it is determined whether the jackpot is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost”.

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 5B, nine jackpot determination random numbers “1” to “9” are “jackpot” when in the low probability gaming state. When it is determined that the game state is a high probability gaming state, the 19 jackpot determination random numbers from “1” to “19” are determined to be “jackpot”. In the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot determination random numbers “20” to “999” are determined to be “small hits”.

  Further, when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state, the jackpot determination random numbers other than “1” to “9” and “20” to “999” are judged to be “lost”, and when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, “1”. The jackpot determination random numbers other than “˜999” are determined to be “lost”. It should be noted that “0” must be set to “lost” because there is a possibility that the jackpot will be hit by combining the initialization of the random number for jackpot determination due to intentional power interruption and the so-called hanging board. Yes.

  Accordingly, since the random number range of the jackpot determination random number value is from 0 to 999, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1 / 99.9, and in the high probability gaming state, the jackpot The probability to be determined is about 1 / 52.6, which is about twice the probability of the low probability gaming state. Note that the probability of being determined to be a big hit is not limited to twice, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 5 times.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery). Specifically, FIG. 6A is a jackpot special symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine a special symbol stop symbol when it is determined that the jackpot (winning), FIG. 6B. Is a special symbol determination table for small hits that is referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that it is a small winning (winning), FIG. 6 (c) is determined to be lost (winning) It is a special symbol determination table for losing which is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is done.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the special symbol determination table for jackpots, the type of start opening (type of special symbol display) that the game ball has won (entered), the first start opening 45 or the first (2) Special symbol determination random number value (determination information) in the special symbol determination information acquired when the game ball wins (wins) at the start opening 47, the special symbol type (classification), and the special symbol Special symbol data indicating the type (type) of the event and an effect symbol designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol are associated with each other.

  The special symbols 10 and 12 associated with the first starting port 45 are special symbols that generate a 16-round jackpot game, and the special symbol 13 is a special symbol that generates an 8-round jackpot game. The special symbols 11 and 14 are special symbols for generating a 4-round jackpot game. Therefore, the special symbols 10 to 14 can be rephrased as jackpot first special symbols.

  The special symbols 20 and 22 associated with the second starting port 47 are special symbols that generate a 16-round jackpot game, and the special symbols 21 and 23 are special symbols that generate a 4-round jackpot game. The special symbols 24 and 25 are special symbols for generating a two-round jackpot game. Therefore, the special symbols 20 to 25 can be paraphrased as jackpot second special symbols.

  Note that, even if a jackpot game is generated with any special symbol, a high probability game state in which the number of high probability games is set to 50 after the jackpot game ends (so-called a specific game state or a probable game state) Is supposed to migrate.

  As a first feature of the jackpot special symbol determination table, the type of jackpot game that occurs when the jackpot first special symbol is determined and the type of jackpot game that occurs when the jackpot second special symbol is determined Is partially different. By doing in this way, when the game ball is won at the first start opening 45 and when the game ball is won at the second start opening 45, it is possible to make the game nature different and improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

  Also, as a second feature of the special symbol determination table for jackpots, the jackpot game (16) that has the maximum number of rounds when the second jackpot special symbol is determined and when the first jackpot special symbol is determined. The ratio of occurrence of rounds is different. Therefore, it is possible to change the player's expectation when a game ball is won at the first start port 45 and when a game ball is won at the second start port 45, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, in the special symbol determination table for small hits, the type of the start opening (type of special symbol display) that the game ball has won (entered) and the second start opening 47 A special symbol determination random number value in the special symbol determination information acquired when the game ball wins (ball), a special symbol type (type), and a special symbol data indicating a special symbol type, An effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol is associated.

  The special symbols 26 to 28 associated with the second starting opening 47 have no concept of round games, and the big winning mouths (the first big winning mouth 50 and the second big winning mouth 53) are converted from the closed state to the open state. It is a special symbol that generates a small hit game. Therefore, the special symbols 26 to 28 can be rephrased as the second special symbol for small hits. In principle, the game state is not changed before and after the jackpot game, but when the jackpot game is executed at the 50th rotation after the jackpot game ends. Will shift to the normal gaming state as if the number of high probability games has expired.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (c), in the special symbol determination table for losing, the type of start opening (type of special symbol display) that the game ball has won (entered), the first start opening 45 or the 2 Special symbol determination random number (0 to 99), special symbol type (type), and special symbol in the special symbol determination information acquired when a game ball wins (starts) at the starting port 47 Special symbol data indicating the type of the symbol and an effect symbol designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol are associated with each other.

  The special symbol 19 associated with the first starting port 45 and the special symbol 29 associated with the second starting port 47 are special symbols that do not generate either a big hit game or a small hit game. Therefore, the special symbol 19 can be rephrased as a lost first special symbol, and the special symbol 29 can be rephrased as a lost second special symbol. In the embodiment of the present invention, one special lose symbol is associated with each of the first start port 45 and the second start port 47, but a plurality of special lose symbols may be associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (c), and determines the type of special symbol (stop special) based on the type of the start port, the random number for determining the special symbol, and the like. Based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data), an effect symbol designating command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined and transmitted to the effect control board 130. ing.

  Note that the type of jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game end are determined according to the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), but only the type of jackpot game may be determined. Only the game state after the end of the jackpot game may be determined.

(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
7 and 8 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table for a special symbol that is referred to when the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Specifically, FIG. 7 (a) shows a normal game that is referred to when a variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on a winning (winning) of a game ball in the first starting port 45 in the normal game state. FIG. 7B is a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the state, and FIG. 7B shows the first special symbol based on the winning (entering ball) of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in the high probability gaming state. It is a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the high probability gaming state referred to when performing variation display.

  FIG. 8A shows the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, which is referred to when the second special symbol is displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball (winning) in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 8B is a variation pattern determination table for 2 special symbols, and FIG. 8B shows the variation display of the second special symbol based on the winning (entry) of the game ball to the second starting port 47 in the high probability gaming state. It is a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state referred to when performing.

  As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, each variation pattern determination table includes a determination result of jackpot determination (lottery), a special symbol type (stop symbol data), the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. Of the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (ball), and the special figure determination information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. 1st special figure hold number (U1) which is the number of the second special symbol, or the second special figure hold number (U2) which is the number of special figure determination information where the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the first start port 45 Alternatively, the special figure variation pattern determination random number (0 to 99) in the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47 and the special symbol variation pattern (number) ), Special symbol variation time, and information indicating the special symbol variation pattern type A variation pattern designation command transmitted to the performance control board 130 Te is associated.

  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) and the special symbol variation time. In addition, when the jackpot determination (lottery) determination result is lost, the reach determination random number value is referred to. However, in the case of a big hit, the reach is generated except in special cases, so the reach determination random number value is referred to. It is configured not to.

  In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7A, the variation pattern is determined according to the first special figure holding number (U1) when the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is lost. ing. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern 2 (shortening fluctuation: shorter than the fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation: fluctuation time 12 seconds) so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases. The fluctuation time (3 seconds) is easily determined. On the other hand, in each variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7A, FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, even if the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is a loss, The variation pattern is determined without depending on (the number of special figure hold, the number of second special figure hold). That is, even if the number of special figure reservations (the number of first special figure reservations, the number of second special figure reservations) increases, the variation pattern is not determined so that the variation time of the special symbol is shortened.

  In addition, the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) are up to “4”, but the special symbol variation pattern is obtained by subtracting “1” from the special reservation number. Since it is determined later, “4” is not set as the special figure reservation number.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8, determines the jackpot determination (lottery) determination result, special symbol type (stop symbol data), reach determination random value, first Based on the special figure hold number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2) and the random number value for determining the special figure variation pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined. Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  As will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the contents of the change effect related to the change display of the first effect symbol 70a and the second effect symbol 70b based on the change pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. Therefore, in the rightmost column of each variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the content of the variation effect (variation effect pattern) is described as a reference.

  As the contents of the effects shown in each variation pattern determination table of FIG. 7, “normal variation” and “shortening variation” means that the plurality of first effect symbols 70a vary at high speed and stop without reaching. The shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.

  In addition, “reach” means that a part of the combination of the first effect symbol 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the player expects a big hit expectation that other first effect symbols 70a change. It means the variation mode to be given. For example, when the combination of three first effect symbols 70a of “777” is set as the combination of the first effect symbols 70a for notifying of the jackpot (the jackpot result mode), two first effects are set in the left area and the right area. The effect design 70a is temporarily stopped at “7”, and the remaining first effect design 70a is changing in the central region.

  Note that the “temporary stop” means that the first effect symbol 70a is slightly shaken or the first effect symbol 70a is deformed to a small extent so that the first effect symbol 70a is stopped. It is an aspect (not completely stopped).

  “Normal reach” means a reach in which two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left region and the right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region. The reach is the lowest reach, and in the high-probability gaming state, it is a reach that can have the expectation of jackpot. In the present embodiment, a big hit is not made by “normal reach” in the normal gaming state, but a big hit may be made by “normal reach”.

  “Long reach” means a reach in which two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left region and the right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a in the central region fluctuates over a longer time than normal reach. In the normal gaming state, the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach, and in the high probability gaming state, the reach of the jackpot expectation is the highest.

  The “SP reach” means a super reach that has a higher expectation of jackpot than a normal reach, and is a reach that occurs only in a normal gaming state. For example, the three first effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device. It may be generated in the high probability gaming state.

  The “SPSP reach” is a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpot than the super reach, and is a reach that occurs only in the normal gaming state. For example, the three first effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and a special effect is performed more than “SP reach” using almost the entire display area of the image display device. Yes. It may be generated in the high probability gaming state.

  In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of first effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is all in a state of changing at a low speed, and in the present embodiment, when winning in the jackpot lottery It means reach that is only performed.

  As the contents of the effects shown in each variation pattern determination table of FIG. 8, “long variation” is an effect in which one second effect symbol 70b is variably displayed over a relatively long time and then stopped and displayed. It occurs only in the state. It may be generated in the high probability gaming state.

  The “short hitting failure effect” and the “short hitting success effect” are effects in which one second effect symbol 70b is variably displayed over an extremely short time and then stopped and displayed with a small hit on the image display device. An effect is given for determining whether or not a game (a first small hit game or a second small hit game described later) occurs. In the case of the short hitting failure effect, an effect result in which a small hit game is not generated, and in the case of a short hitting success effect, an effect result in which a small hit game is generated is obtained.

  In addition, the “battle beat failure production” and “battle production success production” are productions in which one second production symbol 70b is variably displayed over a relatively short period of time and then stopped and displayed on the image display device. An effect is made to inquire whether or not a game (a sixth jackpot game or a seventh jackpot game described later) occurs. In the case of a battle hit failure effect, an effect result that does not generate a jackpot game is obtained, and in the case of a battle hit success effect, an effect result that a jackpot game occurs.

  “Rushing failure production” and “rushing success production” are productions in which one second production symbol 70b is variably displayed over a relatively short period of time and then stopped and displayed on the image display device. An effect is made to tell whether or not a game (eighth jackpot game or ninth jackpot game described later) is generated. In the case of the rush hit failure production, the effect results that the jackpot game does not occur, and in the case of the rush hit success effect, the effect results that the jackpot game occurs.

  Further, the “superioring failure production” and “superioring success production” are productions in which one second production symbol 70b is variably displayed over a relatively short period of time and then stopped and displayed as a big hit on the image display device. It is designed to produce an effect as to whether or not a game (a 10th jackpot game or an 11th jackpot game described later) is generated. In other words, an effect is made to indicate whether or not the number of high-probability games is added (whether or not the high-probability game state continues). In the case of an unsuccessful add-on production, a jackpot game is not generated (the number of high-probability games is not added). ) Production results.

  In each variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7B, FIG. 8A, and FIG. 8B, even if the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is a loss, a special design holding ball The variation pattern is determined without depending on the number, but the variation pattern according to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol when the determination result of the big hit determination (lottery) is lost in any variation pattern determination table May be determined.

  As a first feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the high-probability gaming state than when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal gaming state In this case, the relatively short variation time is more easily determined (the average variation time is short). Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol can be changed between the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, as a second feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the case where the second special symbol is variably displayed rather than the case where the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal gaming state. The relatively long variation time is easy to determine (the average variation time is long), and the case where the second special symbol is variably displayed is higher than the case where the first special symbol is variably displayed in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is easy to determine a short variation time (average variation time is short). Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the left-handed game is executed aiming at the left game area where the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 can be expected, and in the high probability gaming state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is performed. It becomes easy to execute a right-handed game aiming at an expected right-hand game area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by battling game balls.

  Further, as a third feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the normal game among the cases where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The average fluctuation time when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the state is the longest, while the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the high probability gaming state is the shortest. . Therefore, it is possible to promote the left-handed game in the high-probability gaming state while promoting the left-handed game in the normal gaming state.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 9 is referred to when the determination information (result of the special symbol variation display) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 is determined in advance before the special symbol variation display is performed. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the pre-determination table, a game ball enters the first start port 45, the type of start opening, the determination result of jackpot determination (lottery), the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), and The reach determination random number value (0 to 99) in the special figure determination information acquired when the ball is played, and the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 45 A special drawing variation pattern determination random number value (0 to 99) is associated with a start opening prize designation command indicating a planned variation pattern (number).

  Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is “hit or miss” by using the jackpot determination random number value acquired when winning the game ball to the first start opening 45 (winning), and special symbol determination randomness It is possible to determine the type of special game in advance by numerical values.

  Furthermore, because the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value can determine the contents of the production (whether the reach has occurred, the type of reach), etc. in advance, the start winning information (start opening winning designation command) In (DATA), it is possible to determine information on the type of jackpot and the contents of the effect (planned variation pattern).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the prior determination table shown in FIG. Is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start opening winning designation command for notifying the result of jackpot determination, the type of jackpot, the planned variation pattern, etc. is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The prior determination table shown in FIG. 9 is similar to each variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. However, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 9 is used when a game ball is won (entered) in the first start opening 45, whereas each variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 starts the variation of special symbols. It is different in that it is sometimes used. Also, it is different whether or not “special figure hold number” is referred to.

  For this reason, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 9, the type of jackpot or variation pattern can be determined, but the determination result of jackpot determination (lottery) is “lost” and the random number for reach determination is “0”. In the case of “˜89”, the planned variation patterns are the variation patterns 1 to 5, but it is impossible to determine whether the planned variation pattern is “normal variation”, “shortening variation”, or “normal reach”.

  Note that the special symbol prior determination table shown in FIG. 9 is referred to regardless of the gaming state at that time, but a prior determination table having different variation pattern selection modes for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided. You may make it change the prior determination table referred according to a game state.

(Game control table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot game (special game state) when the jackpot winning is determined as a result of the jackpot determination (lottery). (B) is a figure which shows the small hit game control table for determining the progress of a small hit game (special game state), when it becomes a big win winning as a determination result of big hit determination (lottery).

  As shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the big hit game control table and the small hit game control table include stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol, opening time of the special game state, The number of the big winning opening / closing control table for determining the opening / closing mode of the winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53 is associated with the ending time of the special gaming state.

  When the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot game, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 10A, and determines the opening time, the big prize opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the stop symbol data. Become. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set (determined) by determining the type of the big prize opening / closing table, the rightmost column in FIG. The types of games, the types of special winning prizes that are controlled to open and close, etc. are supplementarily described.

  Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the small hit game control table shown in FIG. 10B when generating the small hit game, and based on the stop symbol data, determines the opening time, the big prize opening / closing control table, and the ending time. Will be determined. In the rightmost column of FIG. 10 (b), the type of the small hit game, the type of the special winning opening controlled to be opened and closed, and the like are supplementarily described.

(Big prize opening / closing control table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a big prize opening / closing control table that is referred to when a special game state (a big win game or a small win game) occurs. As shown in FIG. 11, in the special prize opening / closing control table, the table number (TBL.No), the type of the special prize opening to be opened, the round number indicating the number of rounds, and the special prize opening are opened during one round. The special electric operation number (K) indicating the number of times of winning is associated with the maximum opening time of the big prize opening, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between each opening of the big prize opening.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the prize winning opening / closing control table shown in FIG. 11 to specify the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the prize winning opening, and the first to fourteenth prize winning opening / closing control tables (TBL.No = 01- 12), the first to eleventh jackpot games are executed, and the small hit game is executed based on the twelfth to fourteenth prize winning opening / closing control tables (TBL.No = 12-14).

  According to the first big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 01), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the first big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round. A first jackpot game (game per long) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the 16th round.

  According to the second big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 02), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the first big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round. A second jackpot game (a game per long game) that is opened up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the fourth round is executed.

  According to the third big prize opening opening / closing table (TBL.No = 03), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the first big prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is moved from the first round. A third jackpot game (game per development) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the 16th round.

  According to the fourth big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 04), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the first big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round. A fourth jackpot game (game per development) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the eighth round.

  According to the fifth big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 05), the first big prize opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the first big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area from the first round to the fourth round. A fifth jackpot game (game per development) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the round.

  In the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game, and the fifth jackpot game, the jackpot effect executed by the image display device is the same until the fourth round, so which jackpot game is the middle. It is difficult to grasp. In addition, the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game have the same jackpot effect executed on the image display device until the eighth round, so it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. It has become.

  Therefore, at the start of the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game and the fifth jackpot game, which jackpot game is not notified, in the third jackpot game, the fourth round game, the eighth round game, and the fourth jackpot game In the fourth round game, the eighth round game, and the fifth jackpot game, in the fourth round game, the development effect (rank-up effect) that determines whether or not to develop to the next round game is executed on the image display device. ing.

  In the development effect executed during the third jackpot game, a notification indicating that the next round game is developed in the fourth round game and the eighth round game is given. In the development effect that is executed during the fourth jackpot game, a notification is given indicating that the next round game will be developed in the fourth round game, and the next round game is not developed in the eighth round game (the jackpot game ends) Notification is made to show that In the development effect executed during the fifth jackpot game, a notification indicating that the fourth round game does not develop to the next round game (the jackpot game ends) is performed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the player's expectation for the development effect.

  According to the sixth grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 06), the first grand prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the first grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is moved from the first round. A sixth jackpot game (game per long) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the 16th round.

  According to the seventh big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 07), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the first big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round. A seventh jackpot game (game per long) is executed that opens up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the fourth round.

  According to the eighth grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 08), the first big prize opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the first grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is changed from the first round to the 16th. The 8th jackpot game (game per development) is executed to open up to 29.5 seconds per round game up to the round.

  According to the ninth grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 09), the second big prize opening opening / closing member 54 is operated, and the second big prize opening 53 in the lower center of the game area 5a is moved to the first round. The 9th big hit game (game per development) is executed to open 29.5 seconds per round game from the 4th round to the 4th round.

  In addition, since the jackpot effect executed on the image display device is the same until the fourth round in the eighth winning game and the ninth winning game, it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. It has become. Therefore, at the start of the eighth jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, it is not notified which jackpot game is, and in the fourth round game, the development effect (rank-up effect) that tells whether or not to develop to the next round game. ) On the image display device.

  In the development effect executed during the eighth jackpot game, a notification indicating that the fourth land game will be developed into the next round game is given. In the development effect executed during the ninth jackpot game, a notification is given indicating that the game does not develop into the next round game in the fourth round game. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the player's expectation for the development effect.

  According to the 10th grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 10), the first grand prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the first grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is changed in one round game. The 10th big hit game (short hit game) is executed, which is released until 29.5 seconds and is released up to 0.2 seconds in a 2-round game. In a two-round game, since the opening time of the first big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the tenth big hit game can be said to be a one-round big hit game.

  According to the eleventh big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 11), the second big prize opening / closing member 54 is operated, and the second big prize opening 53 that becomes the lower center of the game area 5a is changed to the first round. The eleventh jackpot game (ultra-short game) is executed from the first to the second round until the second round is released up to 0.2 seconds per game. In addition, in the 1 to 2 round games, since the opening time of the second grand prize opening 53 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the 11th big hit game is substantially 0 rounds and is in a high probability game state. This is a special jackpot game for extending a certain period.

  According to the twelfth prize winning opening / closing table (TBL.No = 12), the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the first big prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is set once. A first small hit game that is released for 2 seconds is executed.

  According to the 13th grand prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 13), the first grand prize opening opening / closing member 51 is actuated so that the first grand prize winning opening 50 located on the right side of the game area 5a is 1. The second small hit game that is released for 8 seconds is executed.

  According to the 14th big prize opening / closing table (TBL.No = 14), the second big prize opening opening / closing member 54 is operated, and the second big prize opening 53 on the right side of the game area 5a is set once. A third small hit game that is opened up to 8 seconds is executed.

  It should be noted that the number of award balls (5) when a game ball is won at the second big prize opening 53 is smaller than the number of prize balls (10) when a game ball is won at the first big prize opening 50. Since it is set, the degree of advantage for the player is set such that the third small hit game <the first small hit game <the second small hit game, and therefore, which small hit game is executed by the player It will be possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Here, in the above-mentioned first jackpot game to eleventh jackpot game, a predetermined number (for example, six) of game balls are placed in the big prize opening (the first big prize opening) before the maximum opening time of the big prize opening elapses. 50, when the second grand prize opening 53) is won, even if the opening time has not elapsed, the big prize opening is closed and the game of one round is completed. In addition, in the first small hit game to the third small hit game, a predetermined number (for example, six) of the game balls are received in the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 50, the first winning opening) before the opening time of the big winning opening elapses. When winning the 2 big prize opening 53), even if the opening time has not passed, the big prize opening is closed and the small hit game is ended. Although the specified number is six, it may be any number as long as it is 10 or less.

  In the present embodiment, in the first small hit game, the first big winning opening 50 is opened up to 1.2 seconds once, but may be opened twice every 0.6 seconds. . In the second small hit game, the first big winning opening 50 is opened up to 1.8 seconds once, but may be opened twice every 0.9 seconds. In the third small hit game, the second big prize opening 53 is opened up to 1.8 seconds once, but may be opened twice every 0.9 seconds. In this case, the first grand prize winning opening 50 is opened for 0.6 seconds or 0.9 seconds in the second round of the tenth jackpot game, and the first and second rounds of the eleventh jackpot game. The two big winning openings 53 may be opened for 0.6 seconds or 0.9 seconds so that it is difficult to grasp whether the game is a small hit game or a big hit game.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a game state setting table for setting (determining) the game state after the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 12, in the game state setting table, the type of start opening that triggered the execution of the variable display that generated the jackpot game, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the probability game state, and the high probability game The number of times (X) is associated.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 12, and determines the probability game state and the high probability game number (X) based on the type of the start port and the stop symbol data of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot.

  A feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 12 in the present embodiment is that a transition is made to a high probability game state in which the number of high probability games is set to 50 after completion of all jackpot games. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to give a player a certain sense of security, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that different number of high-probability gaming states may be set depending on the stop symbol data. For example, one of the stop symbol data 10 to 14 and the stop symbol data 20 to 25 is shifted to a high probability game state in which the number of high probability games is 50, and the other is a high probability game state in which the number of high probability games is 100. Or, for the stopped symbol data 10, 12, 20, and 22, the high probability game state is shifted to the high probability game state with 100 times, and for the other stop symbol data, the high probability that the high probability game number is 50 times. It is good to shift to a gaming state.

(Normal hit judgment table for symbols)
FIG. 13A is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to in a hit determination (lottery) executed based on the passage (incoming ball) of a game ball to the normal gate 44. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the winning determination table includes a presence / absence of a short-time gaming state and a random number value for winning determination in the normal determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. (0 to 99) and the determination result of the random number value for hit determination are associated with each other.

  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 13A, two hit determination random numbers “0” and “1” regardless of whether the game state is the low probability game state or the high probability game state. Are determined to be lost, and 98 hit determination random numbers “2” to “99” are determined to be hits. Therefore, it is 98/100 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

(Stop symbol determination table for normal symbols)
FIG. 13B is a normal symbol stop symbol determination table for determining a normal symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the winning determination (lottery). As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the stop symbol determination table includes the presence / absence of the short-time gaming state, the hit determination result indicating the result of the win determination (lottery), and when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. The random number value for determining the normal symbol in the acquired normal symbol determination information, the normal symbol type (type) that is the determination result, the stopped normal symbol data indicating the normal symbol type, and the information indicating the normal symbol type As shown in FIG. 4, a general map designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 is associated.

  The normal symbol 0 is a normal symbol of a loss that does not generate an auxiliary game that opens the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner. The normal symbols 1 and 2 are the movable member 48 of the second start port 47. Is a normal symbol for generating an auxiliary game in a predetermined manner, and the normal symbols 1 and 2 are set such that the opening manner of the second start port 47 is different.

(Normal pattern change pattern determination table)
FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for a normal symbol that is referred to when a variation display of a normal symbol is performed. As shown in FIG. 13C, the normal pattern variation pattern determination table is acquired when the game ball passes the game state, the determination result of the win determination (lottery), and the normal gate 44. Of the general pattern determination information, a random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern, a variation time of a normal symbol, and a general diagram variation designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of variation pattern of a normal symbol. It is associated.

  Therefore, it can be said that the “ordinary symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the determination result of the win determination (lottery) and the variation time of the ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 (c), the normal symbol variation time is set to be shorter in the case of 1 to 3 than in the case where the number of ordinary symbols held is 0. The second starting port 47 is not immediately opened immediately after starting the right-handed shot to launch the game ball toward the right region (right-handed game region) of the game region 5a where the general gate 44 is provided. When the operation is performed, the second starting port 47 is easily opened with a short span.

(Second starting port opening mode determination table)
FIG. 13D is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port that is referred to when an auxiliary game occurs and the second starting port 47 is opened. As shown in FIG. 13 (d), in the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the stop normal data, the maximum number of times of opening the second starting port 47, the opening time of the winning game (auxiliary game), The first opening time and closing time of the second start port 47 are associated with the second opening time and closing time.

  The stop symbol data 01 (ordinary symbol 1) is a normal symbol that generates a first auxiliary game in which the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is converted to an open state only once (1.6 seconds). The symbol data 02 (ordinary symbol 2) is a normal symbol that generates a second auxiliary game in which the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is converted into an open state twice (each 1 second).

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 14A shows special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) acquired when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 and / or the second start port 47. , A special symbol determination random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a special symbol variation pattern determination random value) are stored in the special symbol determination information storage area. FIG. FIG. 14C is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the storage area, and FIG. 14C is a diagram for determining the normal diagram acquired when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 (random number for winning determination, normal symbol determination) FIG. 14D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit in the general-purpose determination information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on a winning of a game ball to the first start port 45 is stored. And a second special figure determination information storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, and a first special figure determination information storage area and a second special figure determination information storage area. Each of the two special figure determination information storage areas is divided from the 0th storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

  The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area are the first display unit 71C1 and the second display unit of the first hold icon display area 71C. 71C2, 3rd display part 71C3, and 4th display part 71C4 are each corresponded, and the 0th memory | storage part respond | corresponds to the said fluctuation | variation icon display area 71E. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol storage area are the first display section 71D1, the second display section 71D2, and the second display section 71D2. It corresponds to the third display portion 71D3 and the fourth display portion 71D4, respectively.

  In addition, the number of the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first special figure hold number, and the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information The number of special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is the second special figure reservation number.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, each storage unit stores a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random number value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determining random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determining random value.

  When the game ball wins (enters) the first start opening 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination is made in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information storage area. Special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for determining special symbol, random number for determining reach, random number for determining special figure variation pattern) is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number where no information is stored Is done. When the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information storage area. The special figure determination information (the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value) is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that has not been set.

  The 0th storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information storage area when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. Will be shifted and will be referenced to perform the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area stores the special storage stored in the first storage part of the second special figure determination information storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied. The figure determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (c), the common game determination information storage area stores general game determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the general game gate 44. To the fourth storage unit. In addition, the number of the common figure determination information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage part of the common figure determination information storage area-the 4th memory | storage part turns into a general figure pending | holding number.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (d), each storage unit stores a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a random number storage area for determining a normal pattern variation pattern for storing a random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern.

  When the game ball passes through the universal map gate 44 and the universal map determination information is acquired, the universal map determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the universal map determination information storage area. The common figure determination information (the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the common pattern variation pattern determination random value) acquired is stored in the storage unit having a small number.

  In the 0th storage part of the common figure determination information storage area, when the start condition of the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, the normal figure determination information stored in the first storage part of the general figure determination information storage area is shifted, This will be referred to in order to execute the symbol variation display.

(Description of game specifications)
Next, the game specifications of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. First, in the normal gaming state, which is the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, the number of game balls that a player can acquire when left-handed gaming is performed continuously (continue) (approx. 100 shots per minute). It is set so that the expected value of the number of game balls that the player can acquire is lower than the expected value of the player when the right-handed game is continuously (continued) (launched approximately 100 per minute) . In addition, the base (for example, 25) for the right-handed game is set lower than the base for the left-handed game (ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of shot balls: for example, 30).

  More specifically, when a right-handed game is performed continuously (continuously) during the normal gaming state, the small hit game is smaller than the expected number of game balls to be fired before the small hit special game is executed. The variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the normal gaming state is set so that the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired is lower. In other words, when the right-handed game is performed continuously (continuously) in the normal game state (about 100 shots are fired per minute), the number of times of small hit game per unit time is higher in the high probability game state. The average of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state so that it is less than the number of times of the small hit game per unit time when the right-handed game is continuously performed (approx. 100 shots per minute) The variation time is set to be longer than the average variation time of the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, the player performs a left-handed game in which a game ball is launched toward the left area (left game area) of the game area 5a in order to win the game ball at the first start opening 45.

  Then, when the jackpot game is started as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53 is displayed. In order to win the game ball, a right-handed game is performed in which the game ball is fired toward the right region of the game region 5a. In the jackpot game, the game ball is easy to win in the first big winning port 50 or the second big winning port 53 in which the number of winning balls is set larger than that of the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47. Is easy to get a prize ball.

  In 50 high-probability gaming states that shift after the end of the jackpot game, the number of game balls that a player can acquire when left-handed games are played continuously (continue) (approx. 100 shots per minute). It is set so that the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player exceeds the expected value when the right-handed game is performed continuously (continues) (approx. 100 shots per minute). In addition, the base (for example, 130) when the right-handed game is played is set higher than the base (for example, 30) when the left-handed game is played.

  More specifically, the number of game balls that are fired before the small hit game is executed when the right-handed game is continuously (continued) during the high-probability game state (approximately 100 shots are fired per minute). The variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the high-probability gaming state is set so that the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired in the small hit game is higher than the expected value. In other words, during the high probability game state, the number of times of small hit games per unit time when the right-handed game is performed continuously (continue) during the normal game state (approx. 100 shots per minute). The second special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is increased so that the number of small hit games per unit time when the right-handed game is continuously performed (about 100 shots per minute) is increased. The average fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the player can wait for the execution of the jackpot game while increasing the number of balls by playing the right-handed game. For this reason, a right-hand hit is made to fire a game ball toward the right area (right game area) of the game area 5a in order to win the game ball in the second start opening 47 or to pass the game ball to the normal gate 44. Play a game.

  Note that the jackpot game generated as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 47 is a jackpot game (sixth and sixth games) that can be acquired with a relatively large number of game balls. Since the execution ratio of jackpot games (seventh, eighth, tenth, and eleventh jackpot games), in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively smaller than the nine jackpot games), the jackpot game is in a high probability gaming state. The role to lengthen the period is strong, and the specification is such that the ball is increased by the small hit game during the high probability game state.

  However, the number of game balls that can be acquired until the end of the 50 high-probability gaming states is larger than the number of games that can be acquired in the jackpot game (the tenth and eleventh jackpot games) set to the minimum number of rounds. The maximum number of rounds is set to be smaller than the number of game balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (first, third, sixth, and eighth jackpot games). By doing this, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of uplifting in the high probability gaming state and to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot game from being impaired, and to improve the interest of the game Become.

  Note that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the end of the high-probability gaming state may be set to be larger than the jackpot game that is set to the maximum number of rounds.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 110.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process described later in step S10. In this process, the main CPU 110a reads a startup program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on and initializes a flag stored in the main RAM 110c. The details will be described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S30, the big hit determination initial value random value, the special symbol determination initial value random value, and the hit determination initial value. Update the random value, the initial random number for determining normal symbols.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power interruption detection signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power interruption detection signal is not input (step S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. If the power interruption detection signal is input (step S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.

  In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits the timer interrupt. In step S42, the main CPU 110a performs a process of clearing the output port. In step S43, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c and stores it in a predetermined memory. In step S44, a process for turning on the backup flag to be referred to upon recovery from the power interruption is performed. In step S45, a process for prohibiting the RAM access is performed, and the supply of the power supply voltage is completely interrupted. Wait for it to sag.

(Initialization of main control board)
The initialization process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing initialization processing in the main control board.

  In step S10-1, the main CPU 110a waits for 1000 ms so that activation of the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 is completed earlier, and permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S10-2. .

  Next, in step S10-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 57a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 57a is not turned on (S10-3: No), the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if the RAM clear switch 57a is turned on (S10-3: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S10-10.

  In step S10-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag stored in the main RAM 110c is ON. If the backup flag is ON (S10-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-5. If the backup flag is not ON (S10-4: No), the process proceeds to step S10-10.

  In step S10-5, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c. In step S10-6, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c with the calculated checksum to determine whether the checksum is normal. Judgment is made. If the checksum is normal (S10-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-7. If the checksum is not normal (S10-6: No), the control state before power-off is normally restored. The processing is shifted to step S10-10 because it cannot be restored.

  In step S10-7, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c. In step S10-8, the main CPU 110a performs setting processing for the main RAM 110c when power is restored. By performing this setting process, the game progress state (control state) is restored (recovered) to the state before power-off, so the game can be resumed from the state before power-off (in the control state return means) Equivalent).

  In step S10-9, the main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a power recovery designation command. Specifically, in step S10-8, the restored current gaming state is referred to, and a power restoration designation command corresponding to the current gaming state (a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which will be described later, for special figure changing). Any one of a power recovery designation command, a jackpot / medium power restoration designation command, and a jackpot / medium power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Thereby, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current game state.

  In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a clears the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the stack area. In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a performs setting processing for the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on. By performing this setting process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized, so that it is possible to play a game from the state when the gaming machine 1 is shipped.

  In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a performs processing for transmitting a power-on designation command. Specifically, a power-on designation command indicating that the main RAM 110c has been cleared (initialized) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp that the game progress state (control state) has been initialized.

  The main CPU 110a performs CTC (counter timer circuit) activation processing in step S10-13, performs random number circuit activation processing in step S10-14, and permits an interrupt in step S10-15. When this process ends, the current initialization process ends.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates a special game timer counter such as a special symbol stop time or a special electric accessory release time. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as processing, normal symbol time counter updating processing, and opening / closing time updating processing of the movable member 48 is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol stop time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, or a start port close timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number. A specific random value update process for updating a numerical value is performed. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new circulation initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random value, the special symbol determination initial value random value, the hit determination initial value random value, and the normal symbol determination initial value random value in step S130. Perform initial value random value update processing.

  In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second large winning opening detection switch 53a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the detection switch 44a and the passage detection switch 52a, and when there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47, the second special symbol variation display, the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 50, A second special figure special electric control process for performing opening / closing of the second big prize opening 53), setting of a game state, and the like is performed. Details of the second special figure special electric control process will be described later.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a determines the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, the first special symbol variation display, the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 50, A first special figure special electric control process is performed for opening and closing the second big prize opening 53), setting the game state, and the like. Details of the first special figure special electric control process will be described later.

  In step S500, the main CPU 110a determines the acquired common figure determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general figure gate 44, displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, opens and closes the second start port 47, and the like. Performs ordinary power control processing. Details of the general-purpose power control process will be described later.

  Next, in step S600, the main CPU 110a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120. Perform control processing. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

  In step S700, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 55a and the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and designates an error designation command for magnetic abnormality or an error designation for radio wave abnormality. An abnormality determination process for performing a process for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130 is performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2 big prize opening opening / closing solenoid data output to the big winning opening / closing solenoid 54b, special symbol display data outputted to the special symbol displays 60, 61, normal symbol display data outputted to the normal symbol display 62, special symbol hold display 63 , 64, special symbol hold display data to be output, normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display device 65, etc., data creation processing for creating data.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S800, the start opening / closing data, the big prize opening / closing data, the special symbol display data, the normal symbol display data, the special symbol display data, and the special symbol display data. Display output processing for outputting signals such as symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, etc., payout command transmission processing for sending a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, An output control process is executed to execute an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130.

  In step S1000, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, the second special figure special power control process is executed prior to the first special figure special electric control process, but the first special figure special electric control process is executed more than the second special figure special electric control process. It may be executed first. Further, the processing order of the first special figure special power control process may be changed according to whether the game state is the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state. For example, the first special figure special electric control process is executed before the second special figure special electric control process during the low probability gaming state, and the second special figure special electric control process is executed during the high probability gaming state. It may be executed prior to processing, or vice versa.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43 a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43. A process for paying out a prize ball is performed.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the special winning opening 50, and the game ball payout device 100 determines whether or not it has been won. A process for paying out a prize ball and a process for setting predetermined data are performed. Details of the big prize opening detection switch input process will be described later.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. A process for paying out a prize ball from the payout device 100 and a process for setting predetermined data are performed. Details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the game ball A process for paying out a prize ball from the payout device 100 and a process for setting predetermined data are performed. Details of the second start port detection switch input process will be described later.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing and ends the current input control processing. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the normal gate 44, and a process for setting predetermined data is performed. . Details of the gate detection switch input process will be described later.

(Main control board large winning opening detection switch input processing)
The big winning opening detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S220-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first big prize opening detection switch 50a has been input. When the detection signal from the first big prize opening detection switch 50a is input (step S220-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-2, and the detection signal from the first big prize opening detection switch 50a is received. If not entered (step S220-1: No), the process proceeds to step S220-5.

  In step S220-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating ten prize balls to the ten prize ball counters used for prize balls, and in step S220-3, the current is a big hit. It is determined whether or not a game or a small hit game is in progress. If it is a big hit game or small hit (step S220-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-4, and if it is not a big hit game or small hit (step S220-3: No), step S220. Move processing to -5.

  In step S220-4, the main CPU 110a sets a first big prize opening prize command for notifying the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game or the small hit game in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first grand prize winning prize command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 and an image indicating that the winning ball has been acquired is displayed on the image display device, or the number of game balls acquired in the big hit game or the small hit game is displayed. Information indicating the accumulated value is displayed.

  In step S220-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second big prize opening detection switch 53a has been input. When the detection signal from the second big prize opening detection switch 53a is input (step S220-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-6, and the detection signal from the second big prize opening detection switch 53a is received. If no entry has been made (step S220-5: No), the current prize winning port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S220-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating five prize balls to the five prize ball counters used for prize balls, and in step S220-7, the current is a big hit. It is determined whether or not a game or a small hit game is in progress. If it is a big hit game or small hit (step S220-7: Yes), the process moves to step S220-8, and if it is not a big hit game or small hit (step S220-7: No), this time The big prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S220-4, the main CPU 110a sets a first big prize opening prize command for notifying the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game or the small hit game in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first grand prize winning prize command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 and an image indicating that the winning ball has been acquired is displayed on the image display device, or the number of game balls acquired in the big hit game or the small hit game is displayed. Information indicating the accumulated value is displayed.

(Input processing for the first start port detection switch on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (step S230-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input. If this is the case (step S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs processing for adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counters used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, special figure determination is performed. Information (random number for determining jackpot, random number for determining special symbol, random value for determining reach, random value for determining special figure variation pattern) is acquired.

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1), which is the number of special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area, is less than four. To do. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4 (step S230-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-5, and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4 ( In step S230-4: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating by adding “1” to the first special figure hold number (U1) (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special figure. A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved figures (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

  In step 230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and acquires the special storage unit acquired in step S230-3 in the empty storage unit. The figure determination information is stored. As a result, the first special figure hold is stored.

  In step 230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state). If it is in the low probability gaming state (step S230-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the low probability gaming state (step S230-8: No), the current first The start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. In the first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 9 is referred to, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is executed based on the special figure determination information (first special figure hold). The determination is made before the variable display is performed, and first start winning information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the determination is determined.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first start opening prize designation command corresponding to the first start prize information determined in the first pre-determination process in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area. .

  Thereby, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start opening prize designation command receives the first start prize. Analyzing the mouth winning designation command, and starting from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designation command, a predetermined range of one or a plurality of fluctuation display executed before that It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect such as a continuous notice effect that executes the notice effect or a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold icon to the special display form. The pre-reading notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the panel illumination device 74.

(Second control port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input (step S240-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input. If this is the case (step S240-1: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating one prize ball to the one prize ball counter used for the prize ball, and in step S240-3, special figure determination is performed. Information (random number for determining jackpot, random number for determining special symbol, random value for determining reach, random value for determining special figure variation pattern) is acquired.

  It is determined whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2), which is the number of special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information storage area, is less than four. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is less than 4 (step S240-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-5, and the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not less than 4. In (Step S240-4: No), the processing is moved to Step S240-8.

  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating (U1 ← U1 + 1) by adding “1” to the second special figure reservation number (U2), and in step S240-6, the updated second special figure. A second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the figure holding number (U2) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the second special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special figure reservation number (U2) is displayed on the image display device.

  In step 240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and acquires the special storage unit acquired in step S240-3. The figure determination information is stored. As a result, the second special figure hold is stored.

  In step 240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is in the normal gaming state. If it is in the normal gaming state (step S240-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-9, and if it is not in the normal gaming state (step S240-8: No), the current second start port The detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a sends a second start port winning error designation command indicating that a game ball has won the second start port 47 provided in the right region of the game region 5a in the normal gaming state. This is set in the storage area, and the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it is assumed that a right-handed error in which a right-handed game is performed in the normal gaming state has occurred. Notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being performed in the normal game state.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number is “4”, but it may be more or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number may be reduced as compared with the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing gate detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (step S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (step S250- 1: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a acquires common figure determination information (random number value for hit determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern determination), and in FIG. It is determined whether or not the number of universal symbols held (G), which is the number of universal symbol determination information stored in the information storage area, is less than four. When the number of reserved maps (G) is less than 4 (step S250-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-4, and when the number of reserved maps (G) is not less than 4 (step S250-3). : No), the process proceeds to step S250-7.

  In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating (G ← G + 1) by adding “1” to the number of reserved drawings (G) (G ← G + 1). In step S250-5, the updated number of reserved drawings ( A normal symbol memory designation command corresponding to G) is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation. As a result, the normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved general drawings (G).

  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit of the common figure determination information storage area, and the common figure determination acquired in step S250-2 in the vacant storage unit. Store information. As a result, the usual figure hold is stored.

  The main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is in progress. If it is in the normal gaming state (step S250-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-8. If it is not in the normal gaming state (step S250-7: No), the current gate detection switch input End the process.

  The main CPU 110a sets in the effect transmission data storage area a normal gate passing error designation command indicating that a game ball has passed to the general gate 44 provided in the right area of the gaming area 5a in the normal gaming state. The gate detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, a normal gate passing error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a right-handed error notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handed game, assuming that a right-handed error in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal gaming state has occurred. Will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being performed in the normal game state.

(Second special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 23, the second special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the second special figure special electricity processing data, and refers to the branch destination address from the second special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If = 0, the process proceeds to the second special symbol memory determination process (step S310), and if the second special symbol special electricity process data = 1, the process proceeds to the second special symbol variation process (step S320), and the second If the special figure special electricity processing data = 2, the process moves to the second special symbol stop process (step S330), and if the second special figure special electric treatment data = 3, the process moves to the big hit game process (step S340). If 2 special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to the big hit game end processing (step S350), and if the second special figure special electric processing data = 5, the small hit game processing The process proceeds to (step S360), and ends the second special electrically movable device control control processing time when performing each process.

  This “second special figure special electricity processing data” is set as necessary in each subroutine of the second special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, so that subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. Will go.

(First special figure special electric control process of main control board)
The first special figure special electric power control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the first special figure special electricity processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the first special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S402, and the first special figure special electric treatment data. If = 0, the process moves to the first special symbol memory determination process (step S410), and if the first special figure special electricity process data = 1, the process moves to the first special symbol variation process (step S420). If the special figure special processing data = 2, the process moves to the first special symbol stop process (step S430), and if the first special figure special electric treatment data = 3, the process moves to the big hit game process (step S340). If 1 special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350), and when each process is executed, the current second special figure special electric control process is terminated. To.

  As will be described later, this "first special figure special electricity processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the first special figure special electric control processing, so that subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. Will go.

  Note that the jackpot game process at step S340 and the jackpot game end process at step S350 in the first special figure special electric control process are the same as the jackpot game process at step S340 and the step S350 in the second special figure special electric control process shown in FIG. Since the same process as the jackpot game end process is performed, only the second special figure special electric control process will be described.

(Second special symbol memory judgment process of the main control board)
The second special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol in which the jackpot first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60. When it is the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol (step S310-1: Yes), the second special symbol memory determination process of this time is terminated as it is the regulation period of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the jackpot If it is not the stop display period of the first special symbol (step S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game due to the first special symbol is in progress. When the jackpot game is attributed to the first special symbol (step S310-2: Yes), the second special symbol memory determination process of this time is terminated as it is the regulation period of the variable display of the second special symbol, When it is not in the jackpot game due to the first special symbol (step S310-2: No), the processing is moved to step S310-3.

  The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more (step S310-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-4, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not one or more ( In step S310-3: No), the current second special symbol memory determination process ends.

  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a updates (U2 ← U2-1) by subtracting “1” from the second special figure hold count (U2), and in step S310-5, stores the second special figure determination information. The special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted from the first storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  Note that the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the 0th storage unit, and is already stored in the 0th storage unit (random number for jackpot determination used for previous variation display, special symbol determination) Random number value for reach, random number for reach determination, random number for determining special figure variation pattern) is deleted from the special figure determination information storage area.

  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the updated second special symbol reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the second special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the display of the second hold icon is updated in the image display device.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol determination information storage area, determines the special symbol stop symbol data, and produces the effect. A second jackpot determination process for setting the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area is executed. Details of the second jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol determination information storage area. Figure variation pattern determination processing is performed. Details of the second special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determined in step S310-8 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S310-10, The variable display of the second special symbol is started. Thereby, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the second special symbol is created in the data creation process in step S800, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S900. In the second special symbol display 61, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a high-probability game flag indicating that it is in a high-probability gaming state is turned on. If it is turned on (step S310-11: Yes), The process moves to step S310-12, and if not ON (step S310-11: No), the process moves to step S310-16. Note that the high-probability game flag is turned on in a jackpot game end process described later.

  In step S310-12, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (X ← X-1) the high-probability game number (X) indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol variation display is executed in the high-probability game state. In step S310-13, a high probability game number designation command corresponding to the high probability game number is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high probability game number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the high probability game number.

  In step S310-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game count (X) has become “0”. If it is “0” (step S310-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-15. If it is not “0” (step S310-14: No), step S310-16 is performed. Move processing to.

  The main CPU 110a turns off the high probability game flag in step S310-15. As a result, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is entered.

  In step S310-16, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-17 sets "1" to the second special figure special electric processing data. Then, the second special symbol variation process is prepared, and the current second special symbol memory determination process is completed. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp the current game state on the effect control board 130.

  As described above, the high probability game count is subtracted after the jackpot determination is made at the start of the variable display instead of at the end of the variable display, and when the high probability game count becomes “0”, the gaming state is changed from the high probability gaming state. Since the low probability game state is returned (changed), for example, when the first special symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second special symbol variation display that should be executed last in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot determination from being performed as a high-probability gaming state at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot determination is not performed as the high probability game state exceeding the predetermined number of high probability games, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an advantage or disadvantage due to the progress of the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second big hit judgment process of main control board)
The second jackpot determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-6-1, the main CPU 110a displays a first special figure jackpot indicating that the first special symbol variation display that has been started is a jackpot (stop display at the jackpot first special symbol). It is determined whether there is a winning flag. If there is a first special figure jackpot winning flag (step S310-6: 1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-6-9, and if there is no first special figure jackpot winning flag (step S310-6-6). 1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-6-2. The first special figure jackpot winning flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the first jackpot determining process described later.

  In step S310-6-2, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 5, and in step S310-6-3, the current probability state and the second special figure determination information storage. The jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the area is compared with the selected jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. If the jackpot is won (step S310-6-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-6-4. If the jackpot is not won (step S310-6-3: No), the process proceeds to step S310-6-3. The processing is moved to S310-6-6. In the following description, the jackpot determination random number value determined to be won by the jackpot is called a jackpot random number value, and the jackpot determination random number value determined to be not won the jackpot may be a lost random value. is there.

  In step S310-6-4, the main CPU 110a displays a second special figure jackpot winning flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot (stop display with the jackpot second special symbol). In step S310-6-5, the second special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 6 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S310-6-10.

  In step S310-6-6, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the current probability state and the second special figure determination information storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table. Check to see if you win the small win. When winning a small hit (step S310-6-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-6-7, and when not winning a small hit (step S310-6-6: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S310-6-9.

  In step S310-6-7, the main CPU 110a displays a second special figure small win winning flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit (stop display with the big special second special symbol) in the main RAM. In step S310-6-8, the special symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 6 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S310-6-10.

  In step S310-6-9, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing shown in FIG. 6 on the assumption that the result of the big hit determination is losing, and moves the process to step S310-6-10.

  In step S310-6-10, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot determination (lottery) has been performed and the special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol determination information storage area. The random number value is compared with the special symbol determination table selected in step S310-6-5, step S310-6-8 or step S310-6-9, and the variation executed by the second special symbol display 61 is performed. A second special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of display is determined.

  In step S310-6-11, the main CPU 110a sets stop symbol data corresponding to the second special symbol determined in step S310-6-10 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-6-12. The effect symbol designation command corresponding to the second special symbol determined in step S310-6-10 is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current second jackpot determination process is terminated. As a result, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data of the second special symbol.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol whose result is a jackpot is being executed (there is a first special symbol jackpot winning flag), the result of the variation display of the second special symbol started from now on Is forcibly processed as a loss, so that the jackpot game resulting from the first special symbol and the jackpot game resulting from the second special symbol are executed at the same time, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The start order of the jackpot game attributed to the start order and the first special symbol and the jackpot game attributed to the second special symbol are not reversed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol that results in a jackpot is executed (there is a first special chart jackpot winning flag), it is stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special chart determination information storage area The jackpot determination random number value is determined by using the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol whose determination result is only a loss. You may do it.

(Second special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board)
The second special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a second special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-7-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a low-probability gaming state based on whether or not a high-probability gaming flag is ON. If it is a low probability gaming state (step S310-7-1: Yes), in step S310-7-2, the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is selected and step S310-7 is performed. If the process is shifted to -4 and it is not the low probability gaming state (step S310-7-1: No), in step S310-7-3, the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state is displayed. Select and move the process to step S310-7-4.

  In step S310-7-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination result, the second special symbol type, the reach determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area, and the special determination value. The variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined by comparing the random number for determining the variation pattern with the selected variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol.

  In step S310-7-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S310-7-6, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. 2 The special symbol variation pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current second special symbol variation pattern determination process is terminated. Thereby, the second special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

(Second special symbol variation processing of main control board)
The second special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a first special figure big hit winning flag. If there is a first special figure jackpot winning flag (step S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if there is no first special figure jackpot winning flag (step S320-1: No), Then, the process proceeds to step S320-4.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is during the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol that informs that the first special symbol display 60 is a jackpot. When it is during the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol (step S320-2: Yes), the second special symbol display on the second special symbol display 61 is continued, but the second special symbol variation is continued. In order not to subtract the time, the current second special symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is not during the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol (step S320-2: No), the process proceeds to step S320-3. .

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game with the jackpot first special symbol is started (the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol is ended). When the jackpot game is started (step S320-3: Yes), the process is shifted to step S320-6 to forcibly stop the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and when the jackpot game is not started (step In S320-3: No), the process proceeds to Step S320-4.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates the variation time of the second special symbol by 1, and determines whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol has become “0” in step S320-5. . If it is “0” (step S320-5: Yes), the process moves to step S320-6 in order to normally stop the variable display of the second special symbol, and if it is not “0” (step S320-5: Yes) In S320-5: No), the current second special symbol variation process is terminated in order to continue the variation display of the second special symbol.

  In step S320-7, the main CPU 110a sets a second special symbol confirmation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the second special symbol set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the second special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop display of the second special symbol.

  In step S320-7, the main CPU 110a stops the second special symbol corresponding to the stop symbol data of the second special symbol set in the main RAM on the second special symbol display 61, and in step S320-8. The stop time of the second special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-9, "2" is set in the second special symbol special electric processing data, and the second special symbol stop processing is performed. Preparation for transfer is performed, and this second special symbol variation process is terminated.

  As described above, when the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol ends (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol starts), the loss variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. During the jackpot game, the special symbol losing change display is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol, the losing variation display of the second special symbol continues, but the subtraction of the variation time stops, so the stop display period of the jackpot first special symbol and the losing second special symbol The stop display period of no longer overlaps. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (normal stop, forced stop), a second special symbol confirmation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the second special symbol is transmitted. 2. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the result of the variable display of special symbols.

  In addition, when the jackpot first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the loss variation display and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol are forcibly stopped and the stop display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. You may make it overlap.

(Second special symbol stop process of main control board)
The second special symbol stop process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the second special symbol has ended. When the stop time of the second special symbol has ended (step S330-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-2, and when the stop time of the second special symbol has not ended (step S330-1: No) ends the second special symbol stop process this time in order to continue the stop display of the second special symbol.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 is the jackpot second special symbol. If it is a jackpot second special symbol (step S330-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-3. If it is not a jackpot second special symbol (step S330-2: No), step S330-6 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a sets “2” in the second special figure special electric processing data and prepares to transfer the processing to the jackpot game processing. In step S330-4, the high probability game flag and the high probability The number of games is reset, and in step S330-5, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 10 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S330-9 to start the jackpot game.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 is the second special symbol for small hits. If it is the second special symbol for small hits (step S330-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-7, and if it is not the second special symbol for small hits (step S330-6: No), step S330 is performed. Move the process to -12.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets “5” in the second special figure special electric processing data, and prepares to move the processing to the small hit game processing. In step S330-8, the small hit game shown in FIG. The control table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S330-9 to start the small hit game.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the big hit game or the small hit game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S330-10, the stop symbol data (big hit, small hit) of the second special symbol. An opening designation command corresponding to the type of the effect is set in the transmission data storage area. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it is possible to grasp that the opening is started on the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a selects the special prize opening / closing control table, and ends the second special symbol stop process this time. Specifically, the jackpot game control table or the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 10 and the stop symbol data are referred to, and one of the big winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No) shown in FIG. 11 is selected.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a assumes that the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 is the lost second special symbol, and sets "0" to the second special symbol special electric processing data. Then, preparation is made to move to the second special symbol memory determination process, and the current second special symbol stop process is terminated.

(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If it is during opening (step S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is not during opening (step S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the second special symbol stop process (or the first special symbol stop process) has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed (step S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S340-2: No), the opening is continued. This jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, “1” is added to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 50 or the second big prize opening 53) has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area. .

  In addition, in order to operate the big prize opening / closing member (the first big prize opening / closing member 51 or the second big prize opening / closing member 54), the big prize opening / closing solenoid (the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second big prize winning). Energization data for energizing the opening / closing solenoid 54b) is set. As a result, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in the second special symbol stop process, the opening time of the big winning opening is determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area, and this big hit game The process ends. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of rounds. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, a round designation command for the first opening is set.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening and closing solenoid is set. If the big prize opening is open (step S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If the big prize opening is not open (step S340-6: No), step S340 is performed. Move the process to -9.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending the opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, this corresponds to the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) reaching the specified number (6) or the opening time at the current opening number (K). When the opening end condition is satisfied (step S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S340-8, and when the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S340-7: No). This jackpot game processing is terminated.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid to clear the special prize opening / closing member in the closed state is cleared, and the current jackpot game process is terminated. Thereby, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the big prize opening is closed. Further, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K), the closing time of the big winning opening is set in the main RAM 110c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In the interval (big prize opening closing) process of step S340-8, an interval designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. The interval designation command may be set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (large winning opening closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening and closing solenoid is set. If it is during the interval (close the big prize opening) (step S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10, and if not during the interval (closes the big prize opening) (step S340-9: No). Moves the process to step S340-19.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big prize opening has ended. If the closing time is over (step S340-10: Yes), the process moves to step S340-11. If the closing time is not over (step S340-10: No), the current jackpot game process Exit.

  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (6) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the current round is completed (step S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-13. If the current round is not completed (step S340-11: No), step S340- The processing is moved to 12.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening release process and ends the current jackpot game process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Also, energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid is set to open the special prize opening / closing member. As a result, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the big prize opening is opened. Further, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the main winning opening 50 is opened based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area has reached the maximum round game number of the current jackpot game. If it is the end of the final round (step S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17, and if it is not the end of the final round (step S340-13: No), the process proceeds to step S340-14. Move.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs round data setting processing. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-releases (K) storage area and the winning prize-winning ball number counter (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area. ) Is updated by adding “1” (R ← R + 1).

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Also, energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid is set to open the special prize opening / closing member. As a result, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the big prize opening is opened. Further, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, the special winning opening is determined based on the current round game number (R) and the number of opening times (K). Set to timer counter.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area, and this big hit game The process ends. Thereby, a round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of rounds.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area, the big prize opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the values of the respective storage areas. . Further, the ending time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the jackpot game control table and stop symbol data.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets a jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current jackpot game process. Thereby, the jackpot ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp that the ending is the ending.

  In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. If it is ending (step S340-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-20. If it is not ending (step S340-19: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed (step S340-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-21. If the ending time has not elapsed (step S340-20: No), the current jackpot game process is performed. finish.

  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets “4” in the corresponding special figure special electricity processing data (first or second special figure special electric treatment data), and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing. This jackpot game process is terminated.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a acquires stop symbol data set in the main RAM 110c, and selects a gaming state setting table shown in FIG.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 12, if the stop symbol data sets a high-probability gaming flag, the high-probability gaming flag is turned on (set) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. )

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 12, when the stop symbol data sets the high probability game count, the high probability game count (X) is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S350-4, a high probability count designation command indicating the high probability game count (X) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high probability count designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the high probability game count (X).

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a refers to whether or not the high probability gaming flag is ON, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp the current game state on the effect control board 130.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets “0” to the corresponding special symbol special electric processing data (first or second special electric special treatment data), and performs the special symbol memory determination processing (first or second special electric data). Preparation for moving the process to the symbol memory determination process) is performed, and in step S350-7, the corresponding special figure big hit priority flag (first or second special figure big hit priority flag, second special figure big hit priority flag) is cleared. Then, the current jackpot game ending process is terminated.

(Main control board small hit game processing)
The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a small hit game process in the main control board.

  In step S360-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. If it is opening (step S360-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-2. If it is not opening (step S360-1: No), the process proceeds to step S360-5.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the second special symbol stop process (or the first distinction symbol stop process) has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed (step S360-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-3. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S360-2: No), this small hit game The process ends.

  In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the special winning opening opening / closing control table set in the second special symbol stop process (or the first special symbol stop process) is referred to.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process, and ends the present small hit game process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 50 or the second big prize opening) has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area.

  In addition, in order to operate the big prize opening / closing member (the first big prize opening / closing member 51 or the second big prize opening / closing member 54), the big prize opening / closing solenoid (the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second big prize winning). Energization data for energizing the opening / closing solenoid 54b) is set. As a result, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, with reference to the special winning opening release mode determination table set in the second special symbol stopping process (or the first special symbol stopping process), the main winning opening is determined based on the number of times of opening (K). Set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c.

  In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening and closing solenoid is set. If the big prize opening is open (step S360-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the big prize opening is not open (step S360-5: No), the process proceeds to step S360-6. The processing is moved to S360-8.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending opening of the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, this corresponds to the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) reaching the specified number (6) or the opening time at the current opening number (K). When the opening end condition is satisfied (step S360-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-7. When the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S360-6: No), The winning game process is terminated.

  In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (big prize opening closing) process, and ends the current small hit game process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid to clear the special prize opening / closing member into the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the big prize opening is closed. Also, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-20, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K), the closing time of the big winning opening is set in the main RAM 110c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S360-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (closed big prize opening). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special winning opening and closing solenoid is set. If it is during the interval (close the big prize opening) (step S360-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-9, and if not during the interval (closes the big prize opening) (step S360-8: No). Moves the process to step S360-14.

  In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening has elapsed. If the closing time has elapsed (step S360-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-10. If the closing time has not elapsed (step S360-9: No), this small hit game The process ends.

  In step S360-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit end condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning prize winning ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (6) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the small hit end condition is satisfied (step S360-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-12. If the small hit end condition is not satisfied (step S360-10: No), the process proceeds to step S360-12. The processing is moved to S360-11.

  In step S360-11, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process, and ends the current small hit game process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Also, energization data for energizing the prize winning opening / closing solenoid is set to operate the prize winning opening / closing member. As a result, the big prize opening / closing member is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening release mode determination table set in the second special symbol stopping process (or the first special symbol stopping process), the opening time of the special winning opening is determined based on the current number of times of opening (K). Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S360-12, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area to clear the values in the respective storage areas. Further, based on the small hit game control table and the stop symbol data, the ending time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S360-13, the main CPU 110a sets a small hitting ending designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current small hit game process. As a result, a small hitting ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp that it is an ending.

  In step S360-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. When the ending is in progress (step S360-14: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S360-15, and when it is not ending (step S360-14: No), this small hit game process Exit.

  In step S360-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed (step S360-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-16. If the ending time has not elapsed (step S360-15: No), the current small hit game process Exit.

  In step S360-16, the main CPU 110a sets “0” to the corresponding special symbol special electric processing data (first or second special electric special treatment data), and the special symbol memory determination processing (first or second special electric data). Preparation for shifting the process to (symbol memory determination process) is performed, and in step S360-17, the special figure small hit priority flag corresponding to the type of special figure that has generated the small hit is cleared, and the current small hit game process is terminated. To do.

(First special symbol memory determination process of the main control board)
The first special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 110a displays the jackpot second special symbol or the small bonus second special symbol in which the jackpot second special symbol or the small bonus second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61. It is determined whether it is a stop display period. When it is the stop display period of the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol (step S410-1: Yes), the first special symbol memory of this time is considered as the regulation period of the variable display of the first special symbol. The determination process is terminated, and if it is not the stop display period of the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol (step S410-1: No), the processing is moved to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the big hit game or the small hit game due to the second special symbol is being performed. In the case of the big hit game or the small hit game due to the first special symbol (step S410-2: Yes), it is determined that the first special symbol memory is determined to be the regulation period of the variable display of the first special symbol. When the process is finished and the game is not in the big hit game or the small hit game due to the second special symbol (step S410-2: No), the process is moved to step S410-3.

  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of first special figure hold (U1) is 1 or more (step S410-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-4, and the number of first special figure hold (U1) is not 1 or more ( In step S410-3: No), the current first special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates “1” from the first special figure hold number (U1) (U1 ← U1-1), and in step S410-5, stores the first special figure determination information. The special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted from the first storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  Note that the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the 0th storage unit, and is already stored in the 0th storage unit (random number for jackpot determination used for previous variation display, special symbol determination) Random number value for reach, random number for reach determination, random number for determining special figure variation pattern) is deleted from the special figure determination information storage area.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the updated first special symbol reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the display of the first hold icon is updated in the image display device.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and determines the special symbol stop symbol data. The first jackpot determination process for setting the effect designating command in the effect transmission data storage area is executed. Details of the first jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol determination information storage area. Figure variation pattern determination processing is performed. Details of the first special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern determined in step S410-8 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S410-10, The variable display of the first special symbol is started. As a result, LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the first special symbol is created in the data creation processing in step S800, and the created lighting data is output in the output control processing in step S900. In the first special symbol display 60, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a high-probability game flag indicating that it is in a high-probability gaming state is turned on. If it is turned on (step S410-11: Yes), The process moves to step S410-12, and if not turned on (step S410-11: No), the process moves to step S410-16. Note that the high-probability game flag is turned on in a jackpot game end process described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a updates (X ← X-1) by subtracting 1 from the high probability game number (X) indicating the remaining number of times that the special symbol variation display is executed in the high probability game state. In step S410-13, a high probability game number designation command corresponding to the high probability game number is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high probability game number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the high probability game number.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game count (X) has become “0”. If it is “0” (step S410-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-15. If it is not “0” (step S410-14: No), step S410-16 is performed. Move processing to.

  The main CPU 110a turns off the high probability game flag in step S410-15. As a result, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is entered.

  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S410-17 sets "1" to the first special figure special electric processing data. The first special symbol variation determination process is set, and preparation for shifting to the first special symbol variation process is performed, and the current first special symbol memory determination process is terminated. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp the current game state on the effect control board 130.

  As described above, the high probability game count is subtracted after the jackpot determination is made at the start of the variable display instead of at the end of the variable display, and when the high probability game count becomes “0”, the gaming state is changed from the high probability gaming state. Since the low probability game state is returned (changed), for example, when the first special symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second special symbol variation display that should be executed last in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot determination from being performed as a high-probability gaming state at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot determination is not performed as the high probability game state exceeding the predetermined number of high probability games, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an advantage or disadvantage due to the progress of the game, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(First big hit judgment process of main control board)
The first jackpot determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S410-7-1, the main CPU 110a displays a second special figure jackpot indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol that has been started first is a jackpot (stop display with the jackpot second special symbol). It is determined whether there is a winning flag. If there is a second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S410-7-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-7-6, and if there is no second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S410-7-). 1: No), the process proceeds to step S410-7-2. The second special figure jackpot winning flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the second jackpot determining process described above.

  In step S410-7-2, the main CPU 110a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 5, and in step S410-7-3, stores the current probability state and first special figure determination information storage. The jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the area is compared with the selected jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. If the jackpot is won (step S410-7-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-7-4. If the jackpot is not won (step S410-7-3: No), the process proceeds to step S410-7-3. The processing is moved to S410-7-6.

  In step S410-7-4, the main CPU 110a displays a first special figure jackpot winning flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot (stops display with the jackpot first special symbol). In step S410-7-5, the jackpot first special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S410-7-7.

  In step S410-7-6, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing shown in FIG. 6 on the assumption that the result of the big hit determination is losing, and moves the processing to step S410-7-7.

  In step S410-7-7, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot determination (lottery) has been performed and the special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol determination information storage area. The random number value is compared with the special symbol determination table selected in step S410-7-5 or step S410-7-6, and stopped as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display 60. The first special symbol is determined.

  In step S410-7-8, the main CPU 110a sets stop symbol data corresponding to the first special symbol determined in step S410-7-7 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-7-9. The effect designating command corresponding to the first special symbol determined in step S410-7-7 is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current first jackpot determination process is terminated. As a result, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data of the first special symbol.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol whose result is a jackpot is being executed (there is a second special symbol jackpot winning flag), the result of the variation display of the first special symbol to be started from now on Is forcibly processed as a loss, so that the jackpot game resulting from the first special symbol and the jackpot game resulting from the second special symbol are executed at the same time, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The start order of the jackpot game attributed to the start order and the first special symbol and the jackpot game attributed to the second special symbol are not reversed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot is being executed (there is a second special chart jackpot winning flag), it is stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special chart determination information storage area. The jackpot determination random number value is determined by using the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol whose determination result is only a loss. You may do it.

(First special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board)
The first special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a first special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S410-8-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a low-probability gaming state based on whether or not the high-probability gaming flag is ON. If it is a low probability gaming state (step S410-8-1: Yes), in step S410-8-2, the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is selected and step S410-8 is performed. If the process is shifted to -4 and the game state is not the low-probability gaming state (step S410-8-1: No), the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is set in step S410-8-3. Select and move the process to step S410-8-4.

  In step S410-8-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination result, the first special symbol type, the reach determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area, and the special determination value. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined by comparing the random number for determining the variation pattern with the selected variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol.

  In step S410-8-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S410-8-6, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. One special symbol variation pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current first special symbol variation pattern determination process is terminated. Thereby, the first special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

(First special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The first special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a second special figure big hit winning flag. When there is a second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S420-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-2, and when there is no second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S420-1: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S420-5.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is during the stop display period of the small hit second special symbol for notifying that the second special symbol display 61 is a small hit. When it is during the stop display period of the second special symbol for small hits (step S420-2: Yes), the first special symbol display unit 60 continues the variable display of the first special symbol, but the first special symbol If the first special symbol variation process of this time is finished so that the variation time is not subtracted and the stop special second symbol is not stopped (step S420-2: No), the process proceeds to step S420-3. Move.

  In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small hit game with the second special symbol for small hits is in progress. If it is in the small hit game (step S420-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-4. If not in the small hit game (step S420-3: No), the process proceeds to step S420-5. Move.

  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the first special symbol is a jackpot value. If it is a big hit value (step S420-4: Yes), the first special symbol display 60 will continue to display the variation of the first special symbol, but this time so as not to subtract the variation time of the first special symbol. When the first special symbol variation process is terminated and the jackpot value is not reached (step S420-4: No), the process proceeds to step S420-13 to forcibly stop the variation display of the first special symbol.

  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a second special figure big hit winning flag. If there is a second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S420-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-6, and if there is no second special figure jackpot winning flag (step S420-5: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S420-8.

  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is during the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol informing that the second special symbol display 61 is a jackpot. When it is during the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol (step S420-6: Yes), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 60, but the variation of the first special symbol is continued. In order not to subtract the time, the current second special symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is not during the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol (step S420-6: No), the process proceeds to step S420-7. .

  In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game with the jackpot second special symbol has started (the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol has ended). When the jackpot game is started (step S420-7: Yes), the process is shifted to step S420-13 to forcibly stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot game is not started (step In S420-7: No), the process proceeds to Step S420-8.

  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol variation time by decrementing by 1. In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol variation time has become "0". . When it is “0” (step S420-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-10, and when it is not “0” (step S420-9: No), the first special symbol. In order to continue the fluctuation display, the current first special symbol fluctuation process is terminated.

  In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a second special figure small winning flag. If there is a second special figure small win winning flag (step S420-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-11, and if there is no second special figure small win winning flag (step S420-10: No). In order to normally stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process is moved to step S420-13.

  In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a stops the second special symbol stop symbol data (small) set in the main RAM 110c in order to change the small hit variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed to the loss variation display. The winning value is forcibly rewritten with the stop symbol data (lost value) for losing, and the second special figure small winning flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared in step S420-12.

  In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets a first special symbol confirmation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the first special symbol set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the first special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop display of the first special symbol.

  In step S420-14, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the first special symbol corresponding to the stop symbol data of the first special symbol set in the main RAM 110c on the first special symbol display 60, and in step S420-15. The stop time of the first special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S420-16, "2" is set in the first special symbol special electric processing data, and the first special symbol stop processing is performed. Preparation for transfer is performed, and the first special symbol variation process is terminated.

  As described above, when the stop display of the jackpot second special symbol ends (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol starts), the loss variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. During the jackpot game, the special symbol losing change display is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the stop display of the second special symbol for small hits ends (the small hit game corresponding to the second special symbol for small hits starts), the loss variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. During the small hit game, the special symbol lose display is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, even if the stop display of the second special symbol for small hits ends (the small hit game corresponding to the second special symbol for small hits starts), the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is changed to the loss variation display Since it is not displayed or stopped forcibly, the player can enjoy the jackpot variation display, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Also, when the big special 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small special stop symbol data of the 2nd special symbol in the variable display is forcibly rewritten to the lost symbol data, and the small hit variation display is changed to the lost fluctuation display. Since the change is made, the special symbol small hit variation display is not executed during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol, the loss variation display of the first special symbol continues, but the subtraction of the variation time stops, so the stop display period of the jackpot second special symbol and the lose first special symbol The stop display period of no longer overlaps. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the stop display period of the second special symbol for small hits, the loss variation display for the first special symbol and the big hit variation display for the first special symbol continue, but the subtraction of the variation time stops, so the second special bonus for the second small symbol is stopped. The stop display period of the symbol does not overlap with the stop display period of the lost first special symbol or the jackpot first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the first special symbol is stopped (normal stop, forced stop), the first special symbol confirmation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the first special symbol is transmitted, so that the effect control board 130 It becomes possible to accurately grasp the result of the variable display of one special symbol.

  When the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the loss variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the second special symbol and the first special symbol are stopped and displayed. You may make it a period overlap.

(First special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The first special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the first special symbol has ended. When the stop time of the first special symbol has ended (step S430-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S430-2, and when the stop time of the first special symbol has not ended (step S430-1: No) ends the current first special symbol stop process in order to continue the stop display of the first special symbol.

  In step S430-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 is a big hit second special symbol. If the jackpot is the first special symbol (step S430-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S430-3. If the jackpot is the first special symbol (step S430-2: No), the process proceeds to step S430-9. Move processing to.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the first special figure special electric processing data and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing. In step S430-4, the main CPU 110a prepares for the high probability game flag and the high probability. The number of games is reset, and in step S430-5, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 10 is selected.

  In step S430-6, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S430-7, the main CPU 110a transmits an opening designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the first special symbol. Set in the data storage area. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it is possible to grasp that the opening is started on the effect control board 130.

  In step S430-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special prize opening / closing control table, and ends the first special symbol stop process this time. Specifically, the jackpot game control table or the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 10 and the stop symbol data are referred to, and one of the big winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No) shown in FIG. 11 is selected.

  In step S430-9, the main CPU 110a assumes that the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 is the lost second special symbol, and sets "0" to the first special symbol special electric processing data. Then, preparation is made to move to the first special symbol memory determination process, and the first special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

  The jackpot game process and the jackpot game end process in the first special figure special power control process are the same as the jackpot game process and the jackpot game end process in the second special chart special power control process described in FIG. 30 and FIG. The description here is omitted.

(Main figure normal power control processing of main control board)
38 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a general power control process in the main control board 110.

  In step S501, the main CPU 110a loads general-purpose normal power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the general-purpose normal power processing data loaded in step S502, and if normal-purpose normal power processing data = 0, the normal symbol. The process is shifted to the variation process (step S510), and if the ordinary figure normal power process data = 1, the process is shifted to the auxiliary game process (step S520). .

  This “Putsu-Fuji Electric Power Processing Data” will be set as necessary in each sub-routine control processing subroutine as will be described later, so that the sub-routines necessary for the game will be processed appropriately. become.

(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S510-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display is in progress. When the normal symbol variation display is being performed (step S510-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S510-15. When the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S510-1: No), step S510 is performed. The process is moved to -2.

  In step S510-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of pending drawings (G) is 1 or more. When the number of pending maps (G) is 1 or more (step S510-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S510-3, and when the number of pending maps (G) is not 1 or more (step S510-2). : No), this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S510-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates "1" from the number of pending maps (G) (G ← G-1). In step S510-4, the main CPU 110a stores the first number of the diagram information storage area. The common figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted from the storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  The data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) and is already stored in the determination storage area (the random number value for hit determination used in the previous variation display). , Random numbers for determining normal symbols and random values for determining normal variation patterns) are deleted from the general symbol determination information storage area.

  In step S510-5, the main CPU 110a selects a normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 13, and in step S510-6, performs a hit determination process. Specifically, whether the current short time gaming state and the random number for winning judgment stored in the 0th storage part of the common figure determination information storage area are checked against the normal symbol hit determination table to determine whether or not Winning judgment (normal symbol winning lottery) is performed.

  In step S510-7, the main CPU 110a selects the stop symbol determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 13, and performs normal symbol determination processing in step S510-8. Specifically, the current game state, the result of the hit determination, and the normal symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the general symbol determination information storage area are stored in the stop symbol determination table for the normal symbol. The normal symbol type (stop symbol data) is determined by collation, and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S510-9, the main CPU 110a sets a common figure designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the common symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data of the normal symbol.

  In step S510-10, the main CPU 110a selects the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, and in step S510-11, performs the normal variation pattern determination process. Specifically, the current game state, the result of the hit determination, and the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal chart determination information storage area are used to determine the variation pattern for the normal symbol. The variation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the table.

  In step S510-12, the main CPU 110a sets a normal figure variation designation command corresponding to the determined variation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the common figure variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol.

  In step S510-13, the main CPU 110a sets the determined variation time of the normal symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S510-14, the main CPU 110a starts displaying the variation of the normal symbol, and this normal symbol variation process is performed. Exit. As a result, the LED lighting data for variably displaying the normal symbol is generated in the data generation processing in step S800, and the generated lighting data is output in the output control processing in step S900, whereby the normal symbol indicator is displayed. In 62, the normal symbol variation display is executed.

  In step S510-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. When the variation time of the normal symbol has ended (step S510-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S510-16, and when the variation time of the normal symbol has not ended (step S510-15: No). This normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S510-16, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol confirmation command corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop display of the normal symbol.

  In step S510-17, the main CPU 110a causes the normal symbol display 62 to stop display the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and if the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a stop stop symbol, the normal symbol indicator is displayed. Stop 62 and display the normal symbol for loss.

  In step S510-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data is a normal symbol. When the main CPU 110a is a winning normal symbol (step S510-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S510-19, and when it is not a winning normal symbol (step S510-18: No), the current normal symbol is displayed. The variation process is terminated.

  In step S510-19, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the general-purpose normal power processing data and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing in order to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. In Step S510-20, the second starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 13 is selected.

  In step S510-21, the main CPU 110a collates the selected release mode determination table with the normal symbol stop symbol data, and sets the opening time corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. .

  In step S510-22, the main CPU 110a sets a winning opening designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the normal symbol in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the normal symbol variation process of this time. Thereby, a winning opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it is possible to grasp that the opening is started on the effect control board 130.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S520-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. If it is during opening (step S520-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-2. If it is not during opening (step S520-1: No), the process proceeds to step S520-5.

  In step S520-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the normal symbol variation process has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed (step S520-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-3. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S520-2: No), the current auxiliary game process is performed. Exit.

  In step S520-3, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game start processing. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second start port has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (S) storage area.

  In step S520-4, the main CPU 110a performs the second start-up opening process and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 13, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of opening times (S).

  In step S520-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. If the second start port 47 is open (step S520-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-6, and if the second start port 47 is not open (step S520-5: No). Moves the process to step S520-8.

  In step S520-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port opening end condition is satisfied. Specifically, this corresponds to the fact that a specified number of game balls have won a prize at the second start opening 47 or that the opening time at the current opening number (S) has elapsed. If the opening end condition is satisfied (step S520-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-7. If the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S520-6: No), the current assistance The game process ends.

  In step S520-7, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port closing process, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to clear the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 into the closed state is cleared, and the current auxiliary game process is terminated. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second start port 47 is closed. Further, with reference to the second start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 13, the closing time of the second start port 47 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of times of opening (S).

  In step S520-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. If it is during the interval (closed) (step S450-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-9, and if it is not during the interval (closed) (step S520-8: No), this auxiliary game The process ends.

  In step S520-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second start port 47 has elapsed. When the closing time of the second starting port has elapsed (step S520-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-10, and when the closing time of the second starting port 47 has not elapsed (step S520-9). : No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S520-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final opening has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area has reached the maximum number of times of release of the current auxiliary game. If the final opening has been completed (step S520-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520-13. If the final opening has not been completed (step S520-10: No), step S520- The processing is moved to 11.

  In step S520-11, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game progress processing. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1).

  In step S520-12, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port opening process, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 13, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of opening times (S).

  In step S520-13, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game termination processing. Specifically, the number of times of opening the second start opening (S) storage area, the number of winnings in the second start opening 47, and the like are cleared.

  In step S520-14, the main CPU 110a sets a winning ending designation command corresponding to the current auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, a winning ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can recognize that it is an ending.

  In step S520-15, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the ordinary figure normal power process data, prepares to move the process to the normal symbol variation process, and ends the current auxiliary game process.

(Simultaneous fluctuation timing chart)
Next, a timing chart in the case where the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel) will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Timing chart 1)
FIG. 41A is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the start of the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a random number for lose) is acquired. Then, a normal jackpot determination for determining whether or not the jackpot (small hit) is made based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a lost random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and the stop time (for example, the first special symbol is stopped at the timing of T4) , 0.5 seconds), the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol display 60 enters a next variation waiting period until the next variation display is executed.
When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second jackpot determination or a variation of the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  FIG. 41B is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the start of the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a random number for lose) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a lost random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second jackpot determination or a change in the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  As described above, according to FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the result of the variable display is not forcibly processed as a loss or the variable display is not forcibly stopped and displayed. The time during which the display is executed is shortened, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied or suspicious, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 2)
FIG. 42A is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the big special variation display of the first special symbol is started and the big special variation display of the first special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number for jackpot determination (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a lost random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the second special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol display 61 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started, and the state in which the new first jackpot determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the second special symbol of the lose is finished, but since the big hit game is in progress, a new second big hit determination and the second special The state where the variable display of symbols is restricted continues. When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T6, a new first and second jackpot determination and a variable display of the first and second special symbols are allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”) and there is no second reserved memory (the second special figure hold number is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 and In the second special symbol display 61, the next variation waiting period until the next variation display is executed. When there is a first reserved memory or a second reserved memory, a new first and second jackpot determination or Variation display of the first and second special symbols will be performed.

  FIG. 42B is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is started and the loss variation display of the second special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number for jackpot determination (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a lost random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second jackpot determination or a change in the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first and second big special decision or first and second This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the big special first special symbol is finished, and the big hit game corresponding to the big special first special symbol is started. The state in which the new first and second jackpot determinations and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted over the period until the jackpot game ends.

  As described above, according to FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 42 (b), the display of the second special symbol losing variation is not executed during the jackpot game, and the progress of the game is complicated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the player is confused and to improve the interest of the game.

(Timing chart 3)
FIG. 43A is a timing chart in the case where the forced loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the big special variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the big special variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. . Note that the forced loss change display is a change display when the display is forcibly changed to the loss change display instead of the loss change display (a big hit change display or a small hit change display). .

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number for jackpot determination (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins at the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a big hit determination random number value (here, a big hit random number value or a small hit random number value) is acquired. Then, a forcible jackpot determination for determining that the game is lost is not performed based on the acquired random number for determining the jackpot, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the forced shift variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the second special symbol is continued.

  When the stoppage time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the jackpot first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol display 61 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started, and the state in which the new first jackpot determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the second special symbol of the loss is finished, but since the big hit game is in progress, a new second big hit determination and the second special symbol The state in which the fluctuation display is regulated is continued. When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T6, a new first and second jackpot determination and a variable display of the first and second special symbols are allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”) and there is no second reserved memory (the second special figure hold number is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 and In the second special symbol display 61, the next variation waiting period until the next variation display is executed. When there is a first reserved memory or a second reserved memory, a new first and second jackpot determination or Variation display of the first and second special symbols will be performed.

  FIG. 43B is a timing chart when the forced loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is started and the forced loss variation display of the second special symbol is finished first. is there.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number for jackpot determination (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When a game ball wins at the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a big hit determination random number value (here, a big hit random number value or a small hit random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described forced forced big hit determination is performed, and the forced special fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 61.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the second special symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61, and the new second jackpot determination and the variation display of the second special symbol are regulated. This is the suspension period. Then, when the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second big hit determination and a variable display of the second special symbol are allowed. . Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first and second big special decision or first and second This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the big special first special symbol is finished, and the big hit game corresponding to the big special first special symbol is started. The state in which the new first and second jackpot determinations and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted over the period until the jackpot game ends.

  As described above, according to FIG. 43 (a) and FIG. 43 (b), the jackpot game due to the first special symbol and the jackpot game due to the second special symbol are executed simultaneously, The start order of variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the start order of the jackpot game caused by the second special symbol are not reversed, and the game It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the progress is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 4)
FIG. 44A is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the loss variation display of the second special symbol, and the loss variation display of the second special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a random number for lose) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a lost random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is terminated, and a new second big hit determination and a variable display of the second special symbol are allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  FIG. 44B is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started after the start of the loss variation display of the second special symbol, and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is finished first.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a random number for lose) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the loss variation of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a lost random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second jackpot determination or a variation of the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  As described above, according to FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the result of the variable display is not forcibly processed as a loss or the variable display is not forcibly stopped and displayed. The time during which the display is executed is shortened, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied or suspicious, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 5)
FIG. 45 (a) shows that the first special symbol loses variation display starts after the second special symbol jackpot variation display or small hit variation display starts, and the second special symbol jackpot variation display or small hit variation display begins. It is a timing chart in the case of ending.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random value or a small hit random value) Is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts the big hit variation display or the small hit variation display of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a lost random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the second special symbol display unit 61 stops and displays the big special second special symbol or the small special second special symbol (normal stop), and a new second big hit determination Or the variation display of the second special symbol is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time is stopped while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the big special second special symbol or the small special second special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol display 60 The first special symbol for loss is stopped (forcibly stopped) without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation time in, and a new first jackpot determination and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol or the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol is started, and a new second jackpot determination is made over the period until the jackpot game or the jackpot game ends. And the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted continues.

  When the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost first special symbol ends, but since it is a big hit game or a small hit game, a new first big hit determination And the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is restricted continues. When the jackpot game or the jackpot game ends at the timing of T6, a new first and second jackpot determination and variable display of the first and second special symbols are allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”) and there is no second reserved memory (the second special figure hold number is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 and In the second special symbol display 61, the next variation waiting period until the next variation display is executed. When there is a first reserved memory or a second reserved memory, a new first and second jackpot determination or Variation display of the first and second special symbols will be performed.

  FIG. 45B shows the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started after the big special variation display or the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. It is a timing chart.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random value or a small hit random value) Is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts the big special variation display of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a lost random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the loss variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the second special symbol display unit 61 displays the big hit second special symbol or the small bonus second special symbol in a stopped state (normally stopped), and new first and second special symbols are displayed. This is a stop period in which the two big hit determination and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol is finished, and the big hit second special symbol is displayed. The first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the jackpot game corresponding to the second special symbol corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game or the jackpot game is over. 2 The state in which the change display of special symbols is restricted continues.

  As described above, according to FIG. 45 (a) and FIG. 45 (b), the loss variation display of the first special symbol is not executed while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 6)
FIG. 46 (a) is a timing chart when the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol is started after the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is finished first. .

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a jackpot random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts the big special variation display of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described forced forced big hit determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the big special second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and the second special big symbol determination and the variation of the second special symbol are performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stoppage time of the jackpot second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stoppage display of the jackpot second special symbol ends, and the first special symbol display 60 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and it becomes a stop period in which the new first jackpot determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol is started, and the state where the new second jackpot determination and the variation display of the second special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended.

  When the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, but since it is a big hit game, a new first big hit determination and the first special symbol The state in which the fluctuation display is restricted continues. When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T6, a new first and second jackpot determination and a variable display of the first and second special symbols are allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”) and there is no second reserved memory (the second special figure hold number is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 and In the second special symbol display 61, the next variation waiting period until the next variation display is executed. When there is a first reserved memory or a second reserved memory, a new first and second jackpot determination or Variation display of the first and second special symbols will be performed.

  FIG. 46B is a timing chart when the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol is started after the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. is there.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random number value (here, a jackpot random number value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts the big special variation display of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described forced forced big hit determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is finished, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the big special second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and new first and second big special determinations and first and second This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the big hit second special symbol is finished, and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit second special symbol is started. The state in which the new first and second jackpot determinations and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted over the period until the jackpot game ends.

  As described above, according to FIG. 46 (a) and FIG. 46 (b), the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the jackpot game caused by the second special symbol are executed simultaneously, The start order of variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the start order of the jackpot game caused by the second special symbol are not reversed, and the game It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the progress is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 7)
FIG. 47A is a timing chart in the case where the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the small hit variation display of the second special symbol and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is finished first. is there.

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a small hit random value) is acquired. . Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the small hit variation of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or second special symbol is displayed. The suspension period during which the variation display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the second special symbol on the small hit ends, and the small special hit continues while the variable display of the first special symbol continues. A state where the small second hit game corresponding to the second special symbol is started and the variation display of the second special big symbol determination and the second special symbol is restricted is continued for a period until the small hit game is finished.

  When the small hit game ends at the timing of T5, the new second big hit determination and the variation display of the second special symbol are allowed, and the subtraction of the variation time of the first special symbol is resumed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and the first and second big special determinations and When the first special symbol stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol is terminated. A state where the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started and the new first and second jackpot determination and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are regulated over the period until the jackpot game ends. Will continue.

  FIG. 47B is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is started after the small bonus variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. .

  At the timing of T0, the customer is waiting. When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a small hit random value) is acquired. . Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the second special symbol display 61 starts displaying the small hit variation of the second special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start opening 45 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a jackpot determination random value (here, a jackpot random value) is acquired. Then, the above-described normal jackpot determination is performed, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. In addition, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol is forcibly rewritten with the stop symbol data of loss, and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is changed to the forced loss variation display.

  When the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T4, the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol display 61 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started, and the state in which the new first jackpot determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended. When the stop time of the second special symbol (0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lose second special symbol ends, but since the big hit game is in progress, a new second big hit determination and the second special symbol of the second special symbol The state where the variable display is restricted continues.

  As described above, according to FIG. 47 (a) and FIG. 47 (b), the small hit game caused by the second special symbol and the big hit game caused by the first special symbol are executed simultaneously, The start order of the variable display of the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the start order of the small hit game caused by the second special symbol are not reversed, It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 8)
FIG. 48A is a timing chart in the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the loss variation display of the second special symbol is finished first.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing of T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number value for jackpot determination (here, the random number value for loss) is acquired. 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and special game determination information including a random number value for jackpot determination (here, a random number value for losing) is obtained when a game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-described normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1 and stored in the first special chart determination information storage area, and the first special symbol display The first special symbol loss variation display at 60 and the second special symbol loss variation display on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (normally stopped) on the second special symbol display 61, and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is terminated, and a new second jackpot determination or a change in the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. When the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the lost first special symbol is terminated, and a new first jackpot determination and a variable display of the first special symbol are displayed. Is acceptable. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 has the next fluctuation waiting time until the next fluctuation time is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  FIG. 48B is a timing chart when the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the loss variation display of the first special symbol ends first.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing of T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number value for jackpot determination (here, the random number value for loss) is acquired. 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and special game determination information including a random number value for jackpot determination (here, a random number value for losing) is obtained when a game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-described normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1 and stored in the first special chart determination information storage area, and the first special symbol display The first special symbol loss variation display at 60 and the second special symbol loss variation display on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (normally stopped) on the first special symbol display 60, and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost first special symbol ends, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol occurs. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 becomes a next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is stopped and displayed (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is finished, and a new second jackpot determination or a change display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is acceptable. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 has the next fluctuation waiting time until the next fluctuation time is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  As described above, according to FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the result of the variable display is not forcibly processed as a loss or the variable display is not forcibly stopped and displayed. The time during which the display is executed is shortened, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied or suspicious, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 9)
FIG. 49A is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the loss variation display of the second special symbol ends first.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and special game determination information including a random number value for jackpot determination (here, a random number value for losing) is obtained when a game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-mentioned normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1, and the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the first special symbol jackpot variation display. At the same time, the second special symbol display 61 starts to display the variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (normally stopped) on the second special symbol display 61, and a new second jackpot determination or variation of the second special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost second special symbol is terminated, and a new second jackpot determination or a change in the second special symbol is performed. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of second special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 becomes the next fluctuation waiting period until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there are two reserved memories, a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and the first and second big special determinations and This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the jackpot first special symbol is finished, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started. Thus, the state where the new first and second jackpot determinations and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted continues.

  FIG. 49B is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol and the loss variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is finished first.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and special game determination information including a random number value for jackpot determination (here, a random number value for losing) is obtained when a game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-mentioned normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1, and the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the first special symbol jackpot variation display. At the same time, the second special symbol display 61 starts to display the variation of the second special symbol.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and the first special big symbol determination and the variation of the first special symbol are performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the second special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the big special first special symbol is finished, and the second special symbol display 61 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and it becomes a stop period in which the new second jackpot determination and the variable display of the second special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started, and the state in which the new first jackpot determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lose second special symbol ends, but since the big hit game is in progress, a new second big hit determination and the second special symbol of the second special symbol The state where the variable display is restricted continues.

  As described above, according to FIG. 49 (a) and FIG. 49 (b), the loss variation display of the second special symbol is not executed during execution of the jackpot game, and the progress of the game is complicated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that the player is confused and to improve the interest of the game.

(Timing chart 10)
FIG. 50 (a) shows that the first special symbol loses fluctuation display and the second special symbol jackpot fluctuation display or small hit fluctuation display are started simultaneously, and the second special symbol jackpot fluctuation display or small hit fluctuation display is first. It is a timing chart in the case of ending.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing of T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number value for jackpot determination (here, the random number value for loss) is acquired. It is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and when a game ball wins at the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, it includes a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random number value or a small hit random number value) The special figure determination information is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-described normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1 and stored in the first special chart determination information storage area, and the first special symbol display The first special symbol loss variation display at 60 and the second special symbol jackpot variation display or the small hit variation display on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the big special second special symbol or the small special second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and a new second big hit judgment is made. Or the variation display of the second special symbol is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time is stopped while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol display 60 Without waiting for the fluctuation time to elapse, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and a new first jackpot determination and a fluctuation period of the first special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol or the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol is started, and a new second jackpot determination is made over the period until the jackpot game or the jackpot game ends. And the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted continues.

  When the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the first special symbol of the losing ends, but since it is a big hit game or a small hit game, a new first big hit judgment and The state where the variable display of one special symbol is restricted continues.

  FIG. 50B shows the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol and the big hit variation display or the small hit variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the loss variation display of the first special symbol ends first. It is a timing chart.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing of T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing of T1, special figure determination information including the random number value for jackpot determination (here, the random number value for loss) is acquired. It is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage, and when a game ball wins at the second start opening 47 at the timing of T2, it includes a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random number value or a small hit random number value) The special figure determination information is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-described normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1 and stored in the first special chart determination information storage area, and the first special symbol display The first special symbol loss variation display at 60 and the second special symbol jackpot variation display or the small hit variation display on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (normally stopped) on the first special symbol display 60, and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost first special symbol ends, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol occurs. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 has the next fluctuation waiting time until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the big special 2nd special symbol or the small special 2nd special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61, and a new first and second big hit judgment or This is a stop period in which the variable display of the first and second special symbols is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the big hit second special symbol or the small hit second special symbol ends, and the big hit second special symbol is displayed. The first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the first jackpot game or the jackpot game corresponding to the second special symbol corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game or the jackpot game is over. 2 The state in which the change display of special symbols is restricted continues.

  As described above, there is no inconvenience that the loss variation display of the first special symbol is not executed during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game, and the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused. Can be avoided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 11)
FIG. 51A is a timing chart when the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol ends first. .

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one storage, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random value) is stored. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-mentioned loss forced jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special figure determination information acquired at the timing of T1, and the forced loss variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is performed. The display and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the big special second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and the second special big symbol determination and the variation of the second special symbol are performed. The suspension period during which the display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the big special second special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol display 60 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and it becomes a stop period in which the new first jackpot determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are restricted. And the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol is started, and the first and second jackpot determinations and the first and second special symbols change over the period until the jackpot game or the jackpot game ends. The state where the display is restricted continues.

  FIG. 51B is a timing chart when the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol and the big hit variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the forced loss variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. is there.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and 1 is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one storage, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 at the timing of T2, special figure determination information including a random number for jackpot determination (here, a big hit random value) is stored. It is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-described forced forced jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1 and stored in the first special chart determination information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed. The forced loss variation display of the first special symbol on the device 60 and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 are started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the lost first special symbol is stopped and displayed (normally stopped) on the first special symbol display 60, and a new first jackpot determination or variation of the first special symbol is performed. This is a stop period in which the display is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the lost first special symbol ends, and a new first jackpot determination or a change in the first special symbol occurs. Display is allowed. Here, since there is no first reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the first special symbol display 60 has the next fluctuation waiting time until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory, a new first jackpot determination and a change display of the first special symbol are performed.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the big special second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 (normally stopped), and the first and second big special determinations and the first and second This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. Then, when the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the stop display of the jackpot second special symbol is finished, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot second special symbol is started. The state in which the new first and second jackpot determinations and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted over the period until the jackpot game ends.

  As described above, according to FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the jackpot game due to the first special symbol and the jackpot game due to the second special symbol are executed simultaneously, The start order of variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the start order of the jackpot game caused by the second special symbol are not reversed, and the game It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the progress is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart 12)
FIG. 52A is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol are started at the same time, and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol ends first. is there.

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and Special figure determination information that is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage and includes a random number for jackpot determination (here, a small hit random value) when a game ball wins at the second start port 47 at the timing of T2. Is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-mentioned normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1, and the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the first special symbol jackpot variation display. The small special variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the second special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is stopped and displayed (normally stopped), and a new second jackpot determination or second special symbol is displayed. The suspension period during which the variation display is restricted, and the subtraction of the variation time stops while the variation display of the first special symbol is continued.

  When the stop time of the second special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the second special symbol on the small hit ends, and the small special hit continues while the variable display of the first special symbol continues. A state where the small second hit game corresponding to the second special symbol is started and the variation display of the second special big symbol determination and the second special symbol is restricted is continued for a period until the small hit game is finished.

  When the small hit game ends at the timing of T6, the subtraction of the variation time of the first special symbol is resumed, and a new second big hit determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are allowed. Here, since there is no second reserved memory (the number of first special figure hold is “0”), the second special symbol display 61 has the next fluctuation waiting time until the next fluctuation display is executed. When there is one reserved memory or second reserved memory, new first and second jackpot determinations and variable display of the first and second special symbols are performed.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T7, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol (usually stopped), and the first and second jackpot determinations and first and second This is a stop period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. When the stop time of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the stop display of the first jackpot first special symbol ends, the jackpot game corresponding to the first jackpot first special symbol is started, and the jackpot The state where the new first and second jackpot determination and the variable display of the first and second special symbols are restricted over the period until the game ends.

  FIG. 52B is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol and the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol are started simultaneously, and the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is finished first. .

  The jackpot game is executed at the timing T0, and when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 at the timing T1, the special figure determination information including the jackpot determination random value (here, the jackpot random value) is acquired and Special figure determination information that is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area as one hold storage and includes a random number for jackpot determination (here, a small hit random value) when a game ball wins at the second start port 47 at the timing of T2. Is acquired and stored in the second special figure determination information storage area as the second reserved storage.

  When the jackpot game ends at the timing of T3, the above-described normal jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T2 and stored in the second special chart determination information storage area. After that, the above-mentioned normal jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) is performed on the special chart determination information acquired at the timing of T1, and the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the first special symbol jackpot variation display. The small special variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is started simultaneously.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the big special first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (normally stopped), and the first special big symbol determination and the first special symbol are displayed. The change period is restricted, and the subtraction of the change time is stopped while the change display of the second special symbol is continued. In addition, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol is forcibly rewritten with the stop symbol data of loss, and the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is changed to the forced loss variation display.

  When the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the first special symbol elapses at the timing of T5, the stop display of the big special first special symbol is finished, and the second special symbol display 61 does not wait for the fluctuation time to elapse. The lost second special symbol is stopped and displayed (forced stop), and a new second jackpot determination and a variation display of the second special symbol are restricted. Then, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot first special symbol is started, and the state in which the new first jackpot determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are regulated is continued for a period until the jackpot game is ended. When the stop time of the second special symbol (0.5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the stop display of the lose second special symbol ends, but since the big hit game is in progress, a new second big hit determination and the second special symbol of the second special symbol The state where the variable display is restricted continues.

  As described above, according to FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 52 (b), the small hit game caused by the second special symbol and the big hit game caused by the first special symbol are executed simultaneously, The start order of the variable display of the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot game caused by the first special symbol and the start order of the small hit game caused by the second special symbol are not reversed, It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the game is complicated and the player is confused, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the stop time of the special symbol is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds. However, for example, the stop display is performed such that the stop time of the other one is longer than the stop time of one of the jackpot special symbol and the lost special symbol. Depending on the type of special symbol, the stop time may be varied, or may be determined randomly from a plurality of stop times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the special symbol is stopped and displayed due to the passage of the fluctuation time, or even when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (forcibly stopped) without waiting for the passage of the fluctuation time, The special symbol stop time is set, but if the special symbol is stopped and displayed without waiting for the fluctuation time to elapse (forced stop), the stop display is immediately terminated without setting the stop time. You may make it do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are started at the same time, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information storage area is targeted. Prior to the first jackpot determination, the second jackpot determination for the special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information storage area is executed. You may make it perform jackpot determination.

(Description of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 41 and 42 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

  The “first special symbol storage designation command” indicates the first special figure hold number (U1), “MODE” is set as “E0H”, and DATA information is set according to the hold number. .

  The first special symbol memory designation command is used for the effect of the main RAM 110c when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is increased or decreased, and the first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the increased or decreased first special symbol retention number is It is set in the transmission data storage area, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  The “second special symbol storage designation command” indicates the second special symbol hold number (U2), “MODE” is set as “E0H”, and DATA information is set according to the hold number. .

  This second special symbol memory designation command is a transmission data storage area for production in the main RAM 110c when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases or decreases, the second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the increased or decreased number of reservations. To be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol memory designation command” and the “second special symbol memory designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “special symbol memory designation command”.

  The “designation designating command” indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. “MODE” is set to “E1H” for the first special symbol, and “MODE” for the second special symbol. "Is set as" E2H ", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. In addition, since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends, it can be said that the directing design designation command indicates the type of jackpot or the gaming state after the jackpot ends .

  This effect designating command is a transmission data storage area for producing the effect designating command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the special symbol when various special symbols are determined and the variable symbol display is started. And is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  The “variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 60, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  The first special symbol variation pattern designation command is used to change the first special symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  The “variable pattern designation command for the second special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 61, and “MODE” is set to “E4H” DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  The change pattern designation command for the second special symbol is a change for the second special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  In the present embodiment, the “variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol” and the “variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

  The “first special symbol confirmation command” indicates that the special symbol is stopped, “MODE” is set to “E5H”, and DATA information is set according to the result of the jackpot determination. Yes.

  This first special symbol confirmation command is set in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the main RAM 110c when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, and the rendering control board in the output control process of step S900. 130 to be transmitted.

  The “second special symbol confirmation command” indicates that the special symbol is stopped, “MODE” is set to “E5H”, and DATA information is set according to the result of the jackpot determination. Yes.

  This second special symbol confirmation command is set in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the main RAM 110c when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61. In the output control process of step S900, the rendering control board is set. 130 to be transmitted.

  The “normal symbol confirmation command” indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set as “E5H”, and DATA information is set according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  This normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900. become.

  The “start opening prize designation command” is information for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery). If it is based on winning a game ball to the first starting opening 45, “MODE” "E6H" is set, and DATA information is set in accordance with various winning information.

  The start opening prize designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for production in the main RAM 110c when a game ball wins the first start opening 45, and the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start winning information is set in the output of step S900. In the control process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  “Opening command for jackpot” indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set to “E8H”, and DATA information according to the type of jackpot game Is set.

  The jackpot opening designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c for the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game when various jackpot games are started. In the process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, “MODE” is set as “E9H”, and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

  As for this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S900. Will be sent to.

  The “big jacking ending designation command” indicates that various jackpot games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game. .

  As for the jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games are ended, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output control in step S900 is performed. In the process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “specifying opening command for small hits” indicates that various types of small hit games (special game state) are started, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and matches the type of small hit game. DATA information is set.

  The small hitting opening designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c for the small hitting opening designation command corresponding to the type of the small hit game when various small hit games are started. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S900.

  “Small end ending designation command” indicates that various types of small hit games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of small hit game Has been.

  The small hitting ending designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation in the main RAM 110c when the various small hit games are finished, and the small hitting ending designation command corresponding to the type of the small hit game is set. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

  The “ordinary symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of general symbols held (G), “MODE” is set as “ECH”, and DATA information is set according to the number of holds.

  This normal symbol memory designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the main RAM 110c when the regular symbol retention number (G) increases or decreases, and the normal symbol memory designation command corresponding to the increased or decreased number of reserved memories is set. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S900.

  The “common symbol designation command” indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and DATA information is set according to the normal symbol type. Is set.

  In the common symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the normal symbol variation display is started, the universal symbol designation command corresponding to the regular symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. In the output control process of step S900, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “ordinary pattern change designation command” indicates the change time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and DATA information according to the change time of various normal symbols. Is set.

  In this normal pattern change designation command, when normal symbol change display is started, the normal figure change designation command corresponding to the change time of the normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output of step S900 is performed. In the control process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “opening designation command for winning” indicates that various auxiliary games start, “MODE” is set as “EFH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .

  The winning opening designation command is set to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the auxiliary game is started, and the winning opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, “MODE” is set as “EFH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .

  As the winning ending designation command, when various auxiliary games are completed, the winning ending designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output control in step S900 is performed. In the process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “gaming state designation command” indicates whether or not it is a short-time gaming state or a high-probability gaming state, and “MODE” is set to “F0H” and is set according to each gaming state. “DATA” is set.

  The gaming state designation command stores the transmission data for production in the main RAM 110c when the special symbol variation starts, the special symbol variation ends (at the start of the jackpot game), and the jackpot corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot game. It is set in the area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  The “power-on designation command” and the “power-recovery designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and “MODE” is “F1H”. When the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set to “01H to 04H”.

  The power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are the transmission data for production in the main RAM 110c when the power-on designation command or the power-recovery designation command corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization and the gaming state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. It is set in the storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

  The “customer wait command” indicates that the customer wait state in which special symbols are not displayed is changed. “MODE” is set to “F1H” and DATA is set to “05H”. .

  The customer waiting command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900. Will be.

  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set as “F2H”, and “DATA” information is set according to the type of error.

  This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process, or when the game ball is placed in the second start opening 47 during the normal gaming state in the second start opening detection switch input process. When it is determined that a prize has been won, or when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44 during the normal game state in the gate detection switch input process, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is stored in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S900.

(Main process of production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the main process of the effect control unit 130m.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 130a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and processing such as initialization of the sub RAM 102c in which flags and commands are stored is performed.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect random number update process, and thereafter repeats the effect random number update process in step S1002. In this process, a random effect pattern determining random number for determining a variable effect pattern to be executed by the image display device or the audio output device in response to a special symbol variable effect, and a fixed effect pattern to be executed during the variable effect. Random numbers for controlling effects such as a random number for determining a definite effect for determining the timing, an effect pattern for determining the pre-reading notice, and a random number for determining the pre-reading effect for determining the timing.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 130.

First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area, and in step S1200, updates the timer counters for performing time management related to various effects. Process.

  Details of the command analysis process in which the sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step S1300 will be described later.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 130a controls waiting for a customer (such as a customer waiting demonstration display) that is performed in a customer waiting state in which a special symbol change display or special game (big hit game) is not executed. Process.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 130a checks an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the selection button detection switch 19a and suggests a result of the jackpot determination based on the operation on the effect button 17 or the cross key 19. An effect input control process for executing an effect or the like is performed.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 130a determines the game information relating to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (high probability game number information, which is the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed in the probability variable game state, high probability game state). Game information display control processing for causing the image display device to display the jackpot reaming number of times or the like that is the number of jackpots generated while the game is continued.

  In step S <b> 1700, the sub CPU 130 a performs a firing notification control process for causing the image display device to display information that prompts the player to operate the firing handle 15 (game ball firing mode). Details of the firing notification control process will be described later.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 130a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. In step S1900, the sub CPU 130a saves in the stack area. The stored information is returned to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and the current timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1302. If no command has been received (step S1301: No), the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state designation command (step S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303. If it is not a customer waiting state designation command (step S1302: No), the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process for setting a customer waiting effect waiting flag and a waiting time effect waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) until the customer waiting effect is started in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. This command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in the customer waiting effect control process in step S1400 that the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed, a customer waiting effect start command that clears the customer waiting effect waiting flag and indicates the effect information of the customer waiting effect is stored in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer.

  Thereby, a customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the data output process of step S1800, and the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 wait for a customer for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The production is repeatedly executed. The execution and waiting of the customer waiting effect is based on the fact that a so-called change start command (game state specifying command, special symbol specifying command, special symbol changing pattern specifying command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. To finish.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start slot winning designation command. If it is a start opening prize designation command (step S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1305, and if it is not a starting opening prize designation command (step S1304: No), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 130a executes a predetermined notice over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols based on the pre-determined result, a hold icon displayed on the image display device, and the change. A start opening winning time process is performed for determining the so-called pre-reading notice effect such as an icon change notice for changing the icon display mode, setting information on the pre-reading notice effect, and the like, and the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In addition, as the continuous notice effect, the pre-read zone effect in which the zone effect is performed by the image display device and the audio output device in one or more change effects including the notice effect change effect, or one or more changes including the notice effect change effect. Predetermined regularity in the image display device over one or a plurality of variation effects before the continuous effect of the step effect, which is a step-by-step advance effect in which the image display device and the movable effect member 73 perform stepwise step effects. A chance notice announcement effect that stops the display of the effect symbols in an arrangement having a line, a line notice announcement effect that performs a predetermined dialogue effect on the image display device and the audio output device over one or more variation effects including a variation effect to be notified, Effect notice effect in which a predetermined effect effect is produced by the image display device and the audio output device over one or a plurality of change effects including a noticeable change effect Etc. has become possible to run.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command (step S1306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1307, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command (step S1306: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 130a updates the special figure reservation number (U1, U2) stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, shifts various effect information stored in the effect information storage area, A hold information update process for displaying on the image display device the number of hold icons (hold specific information) corresponding to the number of special figure holds is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command (step S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1309, and if it is not a gaming state designation command (step S1308: No), the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process for updating the gaming state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the gaming state specified by the gaming state designation command. An effect mode setting process for setting any one of a plurality of effect modes is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of varying effects performed by an effect device such as an image display device in response to a special symbol variation display executed based on the result of jackpot determination. In the present embodiment, there are roughly provided three types of effect modes, effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C.

  The effect mode A and the effect mode B are normal effect modes indicating that the game state is disadvantageous for the player set corresponding to the normal game state. The effect mode C is an effect mode that represents the most advantageous game state for the player set corresponding to the high probability game state. The production mode C is subdivided into production modes C1 to C3, and the mode is sequentially shifted to the production modes C1 to C3 according to the number of special symbol fluctuation display (variation production) executed in the high probability gaming state. Also good.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an effect designating command. If it is an effect symbol designation command (step S1311: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1312, and if it is not an effect symbol designation command (step S1311: No), the process proceeds to step S1313.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 130a causes the image display device to stop display on the image display device as a result of the fluctuation effect (special drawing lottery effect) performed during the special symbol fluctuation display, that is, the effect that is stopped on a predetermined active line. An effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for determining the symbol arrangement (combination) and the like is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S1313: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1314. If it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S1313: No), the process proceeds to step S1318.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 130 a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining a variation effect pattern that is an effect content (aspect) of the variation effect (special drawing lottery effect) performed during the special symbol variation display. In S1315, it is determined whether or not to execute a confirmed effect (single announcement effect) for notifying that the result of the special symbol variation display (variable effect) is a big hit, and the execution mode of the confirmed effect is determined. Perform a certain effect determination process.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to start a prefetching zone effect, which is a kind of prefetching notice (production) based on the predetermination result, and performs prefetch zone effect execution determination for performing processing for starting the prefetching zone effect. Whether or not to change the hold icon or the change icon displayed on the image display device to a special mode or a different type of special mode with the execution of the effect in step S1317 based on the prior determination result. The icon change notice execution determination process for determining the above is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol confirmation command. If the received command is a special symbol confirmation command (step S1318: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1319, and the special symbol confirmation command is executed. If it is not a confirmation command (step S1318: No), the process proceeds to step S1321.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect symbol variation stop process for setting a variation effect end command indicating that the effect effect is stopped by displaying the effect symbol to be stopped in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The variation effect end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the data output process of step S1800, and the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cause the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed to end the variation effect. Processing for making it happen will be performed.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 130a performs a pre-read zone effect end determination process for ending the pre-read zone effect or the gaze zone precursor effect at the end of the special symbol variation display, and ends the current command analysis process.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a high probability count designation command. If it is a high probability count designation command (step S1321: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1322, and if it is not a high probability count designation command (step S1321: No), the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 130a performs a remaining number update process of updating the remaining number of high probabilities, which is the remaining number of variation displays (variable effects) that can be executed in the high probability gaming state based on the received high probability number designation command. This command analysis process ends.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command (step S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1324. If it is not an opening designation command (step S1323: No), the process proceeds to step S1326.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 130a determines an opening effect pattern to be performed during the opening of the big hit game or the small hit game, and sets an opening effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Perform pattern determination processing.

  The opening effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the data output process of step S1800, and the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 execute the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game. It will be.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuation number update process for updating the number of consecutive games that is the number of jackpot games continuously generated while the high-probability gaming state is continuously generated. End the analysis process. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, the number of consecutive games is set to “1”, and the jackpot in the short-time game state (including the short game state with high probability and the short game state with low probability) When the game is executed, a process of adding “1” to the number of consecutive resorts is performed.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command (step S1326: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1327, and if it is not a round designation command (step S1326: No), the process proceeds to step S1328.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 130a determines a round effect pattern of the jackpot game, and performs a round effect pattern determination process for setting a round effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The command analysis process ends.

  The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the data output processing in step S1800, and the display effect of the big hit game is executed by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  In step S1328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an ending designation command has been received. If an ending designation command has been received (step S1328: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1329. If an ending designation command has not been received (step S1328: No), the current command analysis process ends.

  In step S1329, the sub CPU 130a determines a big hit game ending effect pattern, performs a big hit game ending effect pattern determination process for setting an ending effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, This command analysis processing is terminated.

  The ending effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the data output process of step S1800, and the ending effect of the big hit game is executed by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

(Launch notification control process of production control unit)
The firing notification control process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the launch notification control process of the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1700-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in progress. If it is in the normal gaming state (step S1700-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1700-2. If it is not in the normal gaming state (step S1700-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1700-12. .

  In step S1700-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a usual gate passage error designation command has been received. When the usual gate passage error designation command has been received (step S1700-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1700-3, and when the ordinary gate passage error designation command has not been received (step S1700-). 2: No), the process proceeds to step S1700-7.

  In step S1700-3, the sub CPU 130a within a predetermined period from the start of the normal gaming state (for example, until the specified time (2 minutes) elapses until the specified number of times (one or more times) is ended). It is determined whether or not. If it is within the predetermined period (step S1700-3: Yes), the process moves to step S1700-7 assuming that the current is not the right-handed error monitoring period, and if not within the predetermined period (step S1700-3: No) ) Moves the process to step S1700-4.

  In step S1700-4, the sub CPU 130a adds 1 to a gate passing error counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the normal gate 44 in the normal gaming state. In step S1700-5, the gate passing error counter is defined. It is determined whether or not a value (for example, 3) or more has been reached (whether a right-handed weak error has occurred). If it exceeds the specified value (step S1700-5: Yes), it is determined that a right-handed error with a low error level (notification level) has occurred, and the process moves to step S1700-6, where it exceeds the specified value. If not (step S1700-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1700-7 on the assumption that a right-handed error based on the passing of the game ball to the ordinary gate 44 has not occurred.

  In step S1700-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a right hand weak error notification designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, a right-hand weak error notification designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a right-hand weak error with a low error level (notification level) has occurred by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. The right-hand weak error notification for notifying the user is executed using the image display device or the audio output device.

  In step S1700-7, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not the second start opening prize error designation command is received. If the second start opening winning error designation command has been received (step S1700-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1700-8, and if the second starting opening winning error designation command has not been received (step In S1700-7: No), the process proceeds to step S1700-12.

  In step S1700-8, the sub CPU 130a within a predetermined period from the start of the normal gaming state (for example, until a specified time (2 minutes) elapses until the specified number of times (one or more times) is ended). It is determined whether or not. If it is within the predetermined period (step S1700-8: Yes), the process moves to step S1700-12 assuming that the current is not the right-handed error monitoring period, and if not within the predetermined period (step S1700-8: No) ) Moves the process to step S1700-9.

  In step S1700-9, the sub CPU 130a adds 1 to the start port winning error counter for counting the number of game balls won in the second start port 47 in the normal gaming state, and in step S1700-10, the start port winning error It is determined whether the counter has reached a specified value (for example, 2) or more. When the value exceeds the specified value (step S1700-5: Yes), it is determined that a right-handed error with a high error level (notification level) has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S1700-11, where the value is equal to or greater than the specified value. If not (step S1700-10: No), the process proceeds to step S1700-12 assuming that a right-handed error based on the passing of the game ball to the second starting port 47 has not occurred.

  In step S1700-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a right-handed strong error notification designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, a right-handed strong error notification designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a right-handed strong error with a high error level (notification level) has occurred by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. The right-handed strong error notification for notifying the user is executed using an image display device or a sound output device.

  In step S1700-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a jackpot game or a high probability gaming state has been started. When the jackpot game or the high probability game state is started (step S1700-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1700-13, and when the jackpot game or the high probability game state is not started (step S1700-12). : No), the process proceeds to step S1700-14.

  In step S1700-13, the sub CPU 130a sets a right-handed notification command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a right-handed notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a right-handed notification that prompts the player to execute a right-handed game is displayed by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Or a voice output device.

  In step S1700-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the normal gaming state has been started. When the normal gaming state is started (step S1700-14: Yes), the processing is shifted to step S1700-15, and when the normal gaming state is not started (step S1700-14: No), this time The firing notification control process is terminated.

  In step S1700-15, the sub CPU 130a sets a left-handed notification command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a left-handed notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the left-handed notification that prompts the player to execute the left-handed game is displayed by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Or a voice output device.

  In step S1700-16, the sub CPU 130a clears the gate passage error counter and the start opening prize error counter, and ends the current firing notification control process.

  As described above, when a right-handed game is performed in a normal gaming state and a game ball passes through the normal gate 44, or when a game ball wins the second starting port 47, a right-handed weak error notification or a right-handed game is performed. Strong error notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a left-handed game in which a game ball can win a prize at the first start opening 45, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the first variation effect executed as the main effect. It becomes.

(Example of production in normal gaming state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, an example of an effect in the case where a right-handed error notification is executed during the execution of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the waiting state of the normal gaming state (after power-on, after returning from the high probability gaming state, etc.), the first special display is placed at the center of the display unit of the first image display device 70. Three first effect symbols 70a corresponding to the symbols are stopped and displayed, and one second effect symbol 70b corresponding to the second special symbols is stopped and displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit. Further, the first change notification LED 58a and the second change notification LED 58b located on the right side of the first image display device 70 are in a state of being turned off.

  In this state, when one game ball wins (enters) in the first start opening 45, the first special symbol variation display (losing variation display) is started, and as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the first In the image display device 70, after the first hold icon H1 is momentarily displayed on the first display portion 71C1 of the first hold icon display area 71C, the image display apparatus 70 moves to the change icon display area 71E and becomes the change icon TH, thereby providing the first effect. The design 70a starts the variable display and the first variable effect is executed. Further, the first fluctuation notification LED 58a starts blinking.

  When a right-handed game is performed in this state and one game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47, the second special symbol variation display (losing variation display) is started, and FIG. 59 (c). As shown in FIG. 2, in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon disappears after being displayed on the first display portion 71D1 of the second hold icon display area 71D for a moment, and the second effect design 70b starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, the second variation effect is executed. Further, the second change notification LED 58b starts to flash.

  When the right-handed game is continued in this state and three game balls pass through the general gate 44, the normal symbol variation display (loss variation display) is started, and it is determined that the right-handed weak error is detected. As shown to (a), in the 1st image display apparatus 70, the right-handed error image MEG which encourages left-handed game is displayed on the upper part of a display part with the transmittance | permeability of 25% which can see back, and the audio | voice output device 9 Is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (any one of 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%), so that the right-handed weak error notification is output for a predetermined period (for example, For 5 seconds).

  When the variation time has elapsed since the start of the first special symbol variation display, the loss first special symbol is stopped and displayed while the variation display of the second special symbol is continued, as shown in FIG. In the first image display device 70, the combination (“471”) of the first effect symbol 70a that notifies the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, the blinking of the first fluctuation notification LED 58a is finished and the light is turned off to indicate a loss.

  In this state, when two game balls win (win) in the second starting port 47, it is determined that a right-handed strength error has occurred. As shown in FIG. A second hold icon is displayed on each of the first display portion 71D1 and the second display portion 71D2 of the hold icon display area 71D. In addition, a right-handed strong error image MEG that prompts a left-handed game so as to be superimposed on the front of the first effect symbol 70a is displayed at the center of the display unit with a transparency of 0% that makes the rear see-through impossible. When the right-handed error sound is output at the maximum volume (100%), the right-handed strong error notification is executed over a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first effect symbol 70a) executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed to stand out as the main effect, The second variation effect (variation display of the second effect symbol 70b) executed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed so as not to stand out as a sub-effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being distracted, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, when a right-handed game is played in the normal gaming state and a game ball passes through the normal gate 44, or when a game ball wins the second starting port 47, a right-handed weak error notification or a right-handed strong error notification Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a left-handed game in which a game ball can win a prize at the first start opening 45, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the first variation effect executed as the main effect. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the second effect design 70b is displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70. However, the second image display device 71 performs the second effect. The variation display of the symbol 70b may be performed, or neither the first image display device 70 nor the second image display device 71 displays the second effect symbol 70b, and the variable effect display of the second effect symbol 70b. May not be performed. If it does in this way, the 1st change production performed with the 1st image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In the present embodiment, the second hold icon display area 71D is arranged in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state. However, the second hold icon is displayed on the second image display device 71. The display area 71D may be arranged. If it does in this way, the 1st variation production performed with the 1st image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and a player can be concentrated on the 1st variation production.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed error image MEG displayed on the first image display device 70 in the right-handed weak error notification and the right-handed strong error notification is made the same image, and the transmittance and the size are made different. However, a right-handed error image displayed with a right-handed weak error notification is an image with a low degree of prompting a left-handed game, and a right-handed error image displayed with a right-handed strong error notification is an image with a high degree of prompting a left-handed game The two images may be different from each other. If it does in this way, it will become easy to control the appeal power to a player, and it will become possible to perform suitable right-handed error information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display position and transparency of the right-handed error image displayed by the right-handed weak error notification and the right-handed error image displayed by the right-handed strong error notification are different from each other. And either one of the transmittance and the transmittance may be set to be the same. Furthermore, the right-handed error image displayed by the right-handed strong error notification may be displayed on the entire display unit of the first image display device 70.

  Also, in this embodiment, the right-handed error sound for right-handed weak error notification is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value, and the right-handed error sound for right-handed strong error notification is output at the maximum volume. However, the right-handed error sound for right-handed weak error notification and the right-handed error sound for right-handed strong error notification may be output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value, or output at the maximum volume. Also good.

(Production Example 1 in High Probability Game State)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, an example of an effect when the second small hit game is executed in the high probability game state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), after the start of the high probability gaming state, the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (second jackpot lottery) is notified at the center of the display unit of the first image display device 70. Are temporarily stopped and displayed in a state where the two notification symbols 70c are slightly swung, three first effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the lower left corner of the display unit, and one second effect symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the display unit, the remaining number-of-games information NGG indicating the remaining number of high-probability games and the cumulative number-of-games information TGG indicating the number of variable displays executed in the high-probability gaming state are displayed. A right-handed image that prompts the player to make a right-handed game in the upper right corner of the display unit, and a game ball that is awarded to the big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 53) pays to the player Prize ball number information PG indicating the number of prize balls issued is displayed. . Further, the first change notification LED 58a located on the right side of the first image display device 70 is turned on in a color indicating a big hit (for example, blue), and the second change notification LED 58b is turned off so as to indicate a loss. Yes.

  The notification symbol 70c is a reel-like image in which a total of seven symbols of “7” symbol, “GET” symbol, “add-on” symbol, “BLANK” symbol, “3” symbol, and “LUCKY” symbol are arranged. As the reel-like image moves (rotates) in the vertical direction, the notification symbol 70c facing the window MG is displayed in a variable manner.

  The “7” symbol is a symbol for notifying that the sixth big hit game is executed when two symbols appear on the left and right. The “GET” symbol notifies that the first small hit game or the third small hit game is executed when one appears on either the left or right side, and the second small hit game appears when two appear on the left or right side. This is a symbol for informing that the process is executed. The “add-on” symbol is a symbol for notifying that the tenth jackpot game or the eleventh jackpot game is executed when two symbols appear on the left and right. The “BLANK” symbol is a symbol that informs that it is a loss by aligning two symbols on the left and right. The “3” symbol is a symbol for notifying that the seventh big hit game is executed when two symbols appear on the left and right. The “LUCKY” symbol is a symbol for notifying that the eighth jackpot game or the ninth jackpot game is executed when two symbols appear on the left and right.

  In this state, when one game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47, the second special symbol variation display (big hit variation display in which the second small hit game is executed) is started, and FIG. As shown in b), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon disappears after being displayed on the first display portion 71D1 of the second hold icon display area 71D for a moment, and the second effect symbol 70b and the notification symbol are displayed. 70c starts the variable display and the second variable effect is executed. At this time, the remaining game number information NGG is updated from “50G” to “49G”, and the cumulative game number information TGG is updated from “00G” to “01G”. Further, the second change notification LED 58b starts to flash.

  In this state, when a left-handed game is performed during execution of the second variation effect and one game ball wins (enters) in the first start opening 45, as shown in FIG. The first hold icon disappears after being displayed for a moment on the first display portion 71C1 of the icon display area 71C, the first effect design 70a starts the variable display, and the first change effect is executed. At this time, the remaining game number information NGG is updated from “49” to “48”, and the cumulative game number information TGG is updated from “01G” to “02G”. Further, the first fluctuation notification LED 58a starts blinking.

  When the variation time has elapsed since the start of the display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is continued, as shown in FIG. 62 (a). In the first image display device 70, the second effect symbol 70b for notifying the small hit is stopped and displayed, and the two “GET” symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a slightly shaken state. Further, the second variation notification LED 58b ends blinking and turns on with a color indicating a small hit (for example, white).

  When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses in this state, the second small hit game is started, and the first special symbol for loss is forcibly stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 62 (b). In the display device 70, the combination (“429”) of the first effect symbol 70a that notifies the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, the first fluctuation notification LED 58a is turned off so as to indicate a loss.

  When two game balls are won (entered) in the first big winning opening 50 during execution of the second small hit game, 20 prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 100, and FIG. 62 (c). As shown in FIG. 1, in the first image display device 70, a prize ball image SG for notifying that ten prize balls have been generated is displayed on the upper and lower sides of the display unit, and then the number of ten prize balls is awarded as a prize ball. The addition effect added to the number information PG is performed twice.

  As described above, in the high-probability gaming state, the variation display of the notification symbol 70c executed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed so as to stand out as the main effect, and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. The first variation effect (corresponding to the first effect symbol 70a) and the second variation effect (corresponding to the second effect symbol 70b) displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. Is executed so as not to stand out as a sub effect. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with as little awareness as possible whether the first variation effect is being executed or whether the second variation effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

  In addition, when a game ball is won in the big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 53) during the small hit game generated in the high probability gaming state, the prize is displayed after the prize ball number image SG is displayed. Addition effect of the number of balls is executed. Therefore, the player can be notified (recognized) that a game ball has been acquired during the small hit game (big hit game), and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production Example 2 in High Probability Game State)
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an example of an effect when the eleventh jackpot game is executed in the high probability gaming state will be described.

  When the variation time of the special symbol which has been started for the 35th time since the start of the high probability gaming state, here the variation of the second special symbol (the jackpot variation display in which the eleventh jackpot game is executed) has elapsed, The jackpot second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the first image display device 70 stops and displays the second effect symbol 70b (for example, black circle) for notifying the eleventh jackpot. At the same time, the two “add-on” symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a state where they are slightly swung. Further, the second variation notification LED 58b stops blinking and is lit in a color indicating a big hit (for example, blue).

  In this state, when the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the eleventh jackpot game is started, and as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the first image display device 70 adds the remaining number of high-probability games. An additional image UG indicating that the game is to be displayed is displayed, and, as shown in FIG. 63C, the additional effect is executed by adding the number of times of variable display included in the additional image UG to the remaining game number information NGG.

  The number of variable displays included in the added image UG indicates the difference between the maximum number of high probability games (50 times) and the remaining number of high probability games at the start of the jackpot game (15 times in this example). The number of times of addition is 35 (in this example, 35).

  When one game ball wins (enters) the second big winning opening 53 during the execution of the eleventh big hit game, five prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 100, and FIG. ), The first image display device 70 displays a prize ball image SG for notifying that five prize balls have been generated on the upper part of the display unit, and then displays five prize balls as prize balls. An addition effect to be added to the number information PG is performed.

  As described above, in a high-probability gaming state, when a predetermined jackpot game (tenth or eleventh jackpot game) in which the player cannot acquire a lot of prize balls is started, the first image display device 70 is displayed. The added image UG is displayed, and the added effect is displayed as if the number of variable displays that can be executed in the high-probability gaming state is added. Therefore, in spite of the occurrence of a jackpot game in which it is not possible to obtain a lot of prize balls, it is possible to give a good feeling to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the number of times of variable display included in the added image UG is a number indicating the difference between the maximum value (50 times) of the high probability game number and the remaining number of times of the high probability game number at the start of the jackpot game. , The number of times of addition will change according to the remaining number of high-probability games at the start of the jackpot game, the more the number of remaining high-probability games, the more rewarding the player Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, during a predetermined jackpot game (tenth or eleventh jackpot game) in which a player who has occurred in the high probability gaming state cannot obtain a lot of prize balls, a big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big prize) When a game ball is won in the winning opening 53), the prize ball number adding effect is executed after the prize ball number image SG is displayed. Therefore, the player can be notified (recognized) that a game ball is acquired during a predetermined jackpot game in which the player cannot acquire a lot of prize balls, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In addition, at the timing when the opening of the tenth or eleventh jackpot game is started, the added image UG is displayed on the first image display device 70, but the round game of the tenth or eleventh jackpot game is started. The added image UG may be displayed at the timing, or the added image UG may be displayed at the timing when the ending is started.

  Further, the number of high-probability games is increased up to the maximum value (50) by one addition effect, but, for example, a plurality of additional images UG including the number of variable displays of predetermined times (such as once or twice) are displayed. The number of high-probability games may be increased to the maximum value (50) by displaying them individually and executing the additional effect multiple times. In this way, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of addition and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the added image UG is displayed and the added effect is executed, but a restart image indicating that the high probability game state is started again from the maximum value (50) of the high probability game count is displayed. May be. In this way, it can appear as if a large number of high-probability games have been given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production Example 3 in High Probability Game State)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, an example of an effect when the sixth jackpot game (seventh jackpot game) is executed in the high probability gaming state will be described.

  When the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation display started in the 54th time since the start of the high probability gaming state, here the variation display of the second special symbol (the jackpot variation display in which the sixth jackpot game is executed) has elapsed, The jackpot second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the first image display device 70 stops and displays the second effect symbol 70b (for example, red circle) for notifying the sixth jackpot. At the same time, the two “7” symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a state where they are slightly shaken. Further, the second variation notification LED 58b stops blinking and lights in a color indicating a big hit (for example, red).

  When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses in this state, the opening period of the sixth jackpot game starts, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the first image display device 70 starts the sixth jackpot game. Is displayed, and the remaining game number information NGG, the accumulated game number information TGG, and the winning ball number information are deleted.

  Then, when the opening period of the sixth jackpot game elapses, a round game is started. As shown in FIG. 64 (c), in the first image display device 70, an effect image BEG in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle is displayed. It is displayed and a battle effect is performed. At this time, if three game balls win (win) in the first grand prize opening 50, a total of 30 prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 100, and a prize ball image SG is displayed on the display unit. The addition effect of adding 10 prize balls to the prize ball number information PG is performed three times.

  When the fourth round game is finished, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the first image display device 70 produces an effect in which the teammate character wins as a result of the battle effect, and the round game is continued. Is done.

  Then, in the ending period of the sixth jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the first image display device 70, the high probability game state is started again from the maximum value (50 times) of the high probability game number. When the restart image RSG is displayed and the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 65C, the first image display device 70 displays the same image (cumulative game) as that at the start of the high probability gaming state. For the number information TGG, the same cumulative value at the start of the jackpot game, and for the prize ball number information PG, the cumulative value at the end of the jackpot game) is displayed.

  As described above, during a specific jackpot game (sixth or seventh jackpot game) in which a player who has generated a high-probability gaming state can win a prize ball, the game ball wins (wins) in the first big prize opening 50. Even so, the first image display device 70 does not display the prize ball image SG, and the addition effect of adding the prize ball number to the prize ball number information PG is performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish from the small hit game and other big hit games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, unlike the 10th jackpot game and the 11th jackpot game, it is possible to impress the player that a large amount of game balls can be acquired at once.

  In addition, a restart image is displayed in the ending period of the sixth jackpot game (or seventh jackpot game) generated in the high probability game state. In this way, it can appear as if a large number of high-probability games have been given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Example 4 of production in high probability gaming state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, an effect example in the case where the ninth jackpot game (eighth jackpot game) is executed in the high probability gaming state will be described.

  When the variation time of the special symbol started in the 87th time since the start of the high-probability gaming state, here the variation display of the second special symbol (the jackpot variation display in which the ninth jackpot game is executed) has elapsed, The jackpot second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the first image display device 70 stops and displays the second effect symbol 70b (for example, yellow circle) for notifying the ninth jackpot. At the same time, the two “LUCKY” symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a state where they are slightly swung. Further, the second variation notification LED 58b stops blinking and turns on with a color indicating a big hit (for example, yellow).

  In this state, when the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the opening period of the ninth jackpot game starts, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the first image display device 70 starts the ninth jackpot game. Is displayed, and the remaining game number information NGG, the accumulated game number information TGG, and the winning ball number information PG are deleted.

  Then, when the opening time of the ninth jackpot game has elapsed, the round game is started, and as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the lower portion of the display unit of the first image display device 70 is won by the ninth jackpot game. Special award winning ball number information TPG indicating the total number of winning balls is displayed. At this time, if three game balls win (win) in the first grand prize opening 50, a total of 30 award balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 100, and the winning ball image SG is the number of winning ball images RKG. An addition effect is performed in which the number of the ten prize balls displayed thereafter is added to the award-winning prize ball number information TPG.

  When the ending period of the ninth jackpot game is reached, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first image display device 70 continues to display the special award winning ball number information TPG and the maximum number of high probability games. When the restart image RSG indicating that the high probability gaming state starts again from the value (50 times) is displayed and the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), A similar image is displayed (accumulated value for cumulative game number information TGG at the same time as when the big hit game is started, and for prize ball number information PG, a cumulative value obtained by adding special award winning ball number information TPG).

  As described above, during a special jackpot game (eighth or ninth jackpot game) in which a player who has occurred in a high-probability gaming state can win a prize ball, the game ball wins (wins) at the first big prize opening 50. Then, after the prize ball image SG is displayed on the first image display device 70, an effect of adding the prize balls is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a small hit game or a predetermined big hit game (tenth or eleventh big hit game) is continuously generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, a restart image is displayed in the ending period of the ninth jackpot game (or the eighth jackpot game) generated in the high probability gaming state. In this way, it can appear as if a large number of high-probability games have been given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the ninth jackpot game (or eighth jackpot game) that has occurred in the high probability gaming state, the special award winning ball number information TPG indicating the cumulative number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. After completion, the prize ball number information PG to which the special award prize ball number information is added is displayed. In this way, it is easy to grasp the number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game, and it is possible to impress the player that some winning balls have been acquired.

  In the present embodiment, two notification symbols 70c are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high probability gaming state. However, one notification symbol 70c may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the three notification symbols 70c may be variably displayed. Further, the number of notification symbols 70c to be variably displayed may be changed (increase / decrease) in accordance with the number of variability displays executed in the high probability gaming state. For example, when the variation display executed in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 20 times, one notification symbol 70c is variably displayed, and when it is 21 to 40 times, two notification symbols 70c are variably displayed. In the case of ˜50 times, the three notification symbols 70c are variably displayed and vice versa. If it does in this way, a change can be given to the production in a high probability game state, and it will become possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In the present embodiment, the change display of the notification symbol 70c is executed as the main effect in the high-probability gaming state, but the second change effect (second effect) is executed without executing the change display of the notification symbol 70c. You may make it perform in the center of the display part of the 1st image display apparatus 70 as a main production | presentation. If it does in this way, the 2nd variation production performed with the 1st image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and a player can be concentrated on the 2nd variation production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 53) during the execution of the small hit game or the big hit game generated in the high probability game state, Although the addition effect is performed after the ball is paid out, the addition effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the prize ball is paid out. If it does in this way, it will become easy to link the generation | occurrence | production timing of the prize ball which a player recognizes, and the execution timing of addition effect, and it will become possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the second effect symbol 70b is variably displayed at the lower right corner (the same position as the normal gaming state) of the display unit of the first image display device 70. The two-image display device 71 may perform variable display of the second effect symbol 70b. Moreover, you may make it perform the variable display of the 1st effect design 70a with a 2nd image display apparatus. Further, the first effect design 70a and the second effect design 70b may not be displayed on either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71. If it does in this way, the change display of the alerting | reporting symbol 70c performed with the 1st image display apparatus 70 can be made conspicuous, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, the notification symbol 70c is not completely stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, but is temporarily stopped and displayed in a slightly shaken state. Alternatively, it may be displayed completely stopped. In addition, the notification symbol 70c is not variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, but only when the second special symbol is not variably displayed, it corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol. Thus, the notification symbol 70c may be variably displayed.

  By the way, some conventional gaming machines control a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the advantager than the normal gaming state from the end of the special game until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed. (For example, refer to JP-A-2014-158541). However, the gaming machine as described above has a problem that the game is less interesting in a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a symbol (notifying the determination result of the determination unit) In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display becomes a special result determined in advance. From the end of the game until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed, the game state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the determination means Effect control means for executing a change effect for notification by display means (image display device), and the effect control means is the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed before the specific gaming state ends. Number of times (remaining Number information NGG) is displayed on the display means, and when the special game is executed in the specific game state, an additional number of times (additional image UG) which is a difference between the predetermined number of times and the remaining number of times is displayed on the display means. Then, an extra display is performed in which the extra number is added to the remaining number. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, some conventional gaming machines control a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the advantager than the normal gaming state after the end of the special game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-158541). . However, the gaming machine as described above has a problem that the interest of gaming is poor.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the first start area where the game ball launched into the first game area (left side area) can enter can be used. Based on the first variation display means for executing the first variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) at any one of a plurality of variation times, and a game ball launched into the second game region (right region) enters. A first variation display means for performing a second variation display (a variation display of a second special symbol) at any one of a plurality of variation times based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting area where the ball is possible; When the first variation display or the second variation display becomes the first special result, the first special game that changes from a closed state to an open state that allows a game ball launched into the first game area to enter. When the first special game execution means to be executed and the second variation display becomes the second special result, the first special game is executed. A second special game executing means for executing a second special game for changing the prize winning opening from a closed state to an open state in a more disadvantageous manner, and a predetermined number of times each time a game ball enters the special winning opening. A prize ball giving means for giving a game ball to a player as a prize ball, and a game state control for controlling a specific game state (high probability game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the first special game Means, and the result of the first variation display and the second variation display includes an outlier result in which neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed, and the second variation display is executed. The second special result with the same probability regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the specific game state, and the second variation display is more likely than the probability of being a losing result. The probability of a second special result is high The second game during the normal game state is set to be higher than the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player when the game balls are continuously launched into the first game area during the normal game state. When the game balls are continuously launched into the area, the expected number of game balls that the player can acquire is set to be lower, and the game balls are continuously launched into the second game area during the normal game state. The number of executions of the second special game per unit time when the game ball is continuously launched into the second game area during the specific game state is larger than the number of times the second special game is executed per unit time. The second variation time in the normal game state and the specific game state is set so that the number of executions is greater. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first start area where the game balls launched into the first game area (left side area) can enter. Based on the ball, the first fluctuation display means for executing the first fluctuation display (fluctuation display of the first special symbol) at any one of a plurality of fluctuation times, and the game ball fired in the second game area (right area) First variation display means for performing a second variation display (a variation display of the second special symbol) at any one of a plurality of variation times based on the game ball entering the second starting area where the player can enter When the first variation display or the second variation display becomes the first special result, the first special opening that allows the game ball launched into the first game area to enter the first winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. When the first special game execution means for executing the game and the second variation display becomes the second special result, the first A second special game execution means for executing a second special game for making the grand prize opening open from a closed state to an open state in a manner disadvantageous to another game; and a predetermined time each time a game ball enters the big prize opening A prize ball granting means for granting a player a number of game balls as a prize ball, and a game for controlling to a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the first special game is over; State control means, and the result of the first variation display and the second variation display includes a result of losing neither the first special game nor the second special game, and the second variation display Is executed, the second special result is obtained with the same probability regardless of whether it is the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, and more than the probability that the second variation display becomes a losing result. The probability of the second special result is high In the case where the game balls are continuously fired in the second game area during the normal game state, the expected number of game balls to be fired before the second special game is executed. The variation time of the second variation display executed in the normal gaming state is set so that the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired in the second special game is lower, and the second variation display is performed during the specific gaming state. In the case where game balls are continuously fired in the game area, the number of game balls that can be acquired in the second special game is larger than the expected number of game balls that are fired before the second special game is executed. The variation time of the second variation display executed in the specific gaming state is set so as to exceed the expected value. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port and the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port are performed in parallel. Some have been executed (simultaneously) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-054151). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the relationship of the variable display executed in parallel is not interesting and the interest of the game is poor.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first acquisition unit that acquires the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area, and the first acquisition unit acquires Based on the determination information, the first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result by the first determination means, at any of a plurality of fluctuation times A first fluctuation display means for executing a first fluctuation display (a fluctuation display of the first special symbol), a second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the second starting area, and the second Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a plurality of variable times based on the determination result by the second determination means The second variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) Second variation display means, and special game execution means for executing the special game when the first variation display or the second variation display becomes a special result, and the first variation display means performs the first variation display means. The change display and the second change display by the second change display means can be executed in parallel (simultaneous change), and the determination information is determined to execute the first special game (big hit game). There is special determination information (a jackpot winning value) and second special determination information (a jackpot winning value) determined to execute a second special game (small winning game) that is disadvantageous to the first special game, When the second determination unit determines the determination information acquired by the second acquisition unit during the first variation display (big hit variation display) in which the first special game is executed, the determination information is The second special determination information It is determined that the second special game will not be executed even if the value is a small winning prize value), and the second variation display means is during the first variation display (big hit variation display) in which the first special game is executed. When the second variation display (losing variation display) in which the special game is not executed is started and the first variation display (big hit variation display) is stopped and displayed during the second variation display (losing variation display), Even if the variation time of the second variation display has not elapsed, the second variation display (loss variation display) is stopped and displayed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port and the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port are performed in parallel. Some have been executed (simultaneously) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-054151). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the relationship of the variable display executed in parallel is not interesting and the interest of the game is poor.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first acquisition unit that acquires the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area, and the first acquisition unit acquires Based on the determination information, the first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result by the first determination means, at any of a plurality of fluctuation times A first fluctuation display means for executing a first fluctuation display (a fluctuation display of the first special symbol), a second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the second starting area, and the second Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a plurality of variable times based on the determination result by the second determination means The second variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) Second variation display means, and special game execution means for executing the special game when the first variation display or the second variation display results in a special result, the first variation by the first variation display means. The display and the second variation display by the second variation display means can be executed in parallel (simultaneous variation), and the special game is more than the first special game (big hit game) and the first special game. The first variation display means includes a disadvantageous second special game (small hit game), and the first variation display means displays the first special game during the second variation display (small hit variation display) in which the second special game is executed. When the first fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation display) to be executed is started and the second fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation display) is stopped during the first fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation display), 1 fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation display) While continuing to suspend the counting of the variation time of the first variable display, the second special game (small hit game) is adapted to resume the counting of the variation time of the first variable display to end. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port and the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port are performed in parallel. Some have been executed (simultaneously) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-054151). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the relationship of the variable display executed in parallel is not interesting and the interest of the game is poor.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first acquisition unit that acquires the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area, and the first acquisition unit acquires Based on the determination information, the first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result by the first determination means, at any of a plurality of fluctuation times A first fluctuation display means for executing a first fluctuation display (a fluctuation display of the first special symbol), a second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the second starting area, and the second Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and based on a determination result by the second determination means, at any one of a plurality of fluctuation times. Second to execute the second fluctuation display (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) Dynamic display means, and special game execution means for executing the special game when the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display becomes a special result, the first fluctuation display by the first fluctuation display means, The second variation display by the second variation display means can be executed in parallel (simultaneous variation), and the special game includes a first special game (a jackpot game) and a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than the first special game. The first variation display means includes two special games (small hit games), and the first variation display means does not execute the special games during the second variation display (small hit variation display) in which the second special game is performed. When the variation display (losing variation display) is started and the second variation display (small hit variation display) is stopped during the first variation display (losing variation display), the variation time of the first variation display is displayed. Even if has not passed Variation Show (loss variation display) and is adapted to stop displaying. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port and the symbol variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port are performed in parallel. Some have been executed (simultaneously) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-054151). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the relationship of the variable display executed in parallel is not interesting and the interest of the game is poor.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first acquisition unit that acquires the determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area, and the first acquisition unit acquires Based on the determination information, the first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result by the first determination means, at any of a plurality of fluctuation times A first fluctuation display means for executing a first fluctuation display (a fluctuation display of the first special symbol), a second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the second starting area, and the second Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and based on a determination result by the second determination means, at any one of a plurality of fluctuation times. Second to execute the second fluctuation display (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) Dynamic display means, and special game execution means for executing the special game when the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display becomes a special result, the first fluctuation display by the first fluctuation display means, The second variation display by the second variation display means can be executed in parallel (simultaneous variation), and the special game includes a first special game (a jackpot game) and a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than the first special game. The second variation display means includes the second variation in which the second special game is executed during the first variation display (losing variation display) in which the special game is not executed. When the display (small hit fluctuation display) is started and the first fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) is stopped during the second fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation display), the second fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation display) is displayed. Variation display) and the second variation table It is adapted to continue the variation time counting. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the conventional gaming machines, the first special game is executed in which the prize winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state when the variation display becomes the first special result, and the first display is performed when the variation display becomes the second special result. There has been a case where a second special game is executed in which the special winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state in a disadvantageous manner compared to the special game (see JP-A-2015-192759). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the entertainment of the game is poor during the second special game.

  In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a symbol for notifying the determination result of the determination means In a gaming machine having a variation display means for performing variation display, when the variation display becomes the first special result, the first special game (big hit game) is executed for changing the winning prize opening from the closed state to the open state. When the first special game execution means and the change display become the second special result, the second special game (small win game) that brings the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state in a disadvantageous manner than the first special game. The second special game execution means to be executed and the specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are controlled from the end of the first special game (big hit game) until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed. Game state control means and the big prize Each time a game ball enters, a prize ball giving means for giving a predetermined number of game balls to the player as a prize ball, and an effect of executing a variation effect for notifying the determination result of the judgment means on the display means Control means, and the effect control means is a notification image for notifying the entry every time a game ball enters the big prize opening during the execution of the second special game (small win game) ( A prize ball image SG) is displayed on the display means. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment transitions to the high probability game state in which the high probability game count is set to 50 after the completion of all jackpot games. 50 or the second big prize opening 53) is provided with a specific area, and in a predetermined number of round games (for example, the first round) during the big hit game, the special prize opening provided with the specific area is opened. A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined period (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot game is ended based on the winning of a game ball in a specific area in the round game.

  In addition, after all jackpot games have ended, a high-probability gaming state is set, and if the winning lottery executed at the start of the special symbol variation display in the high-probability gaming state is won, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the normal A gaming machine that returns to a gaming state may be used.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for january game machines and arrange ball game machines.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General-purpose gate 45 1st starting opening 47 2nd starting opening 50 Large winning opening 70 1st image display apparatus 71 2nd image display apparatus 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Discharge control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention is based on first acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the first starting area, and on the first determination information acquired by the first acquisition means. , A first determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on a determination result by the first determination means, the variation display of the first symbol is performed in any of a plurality of variation times. Based on the determination information acquired by the second acquisition means, the second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the first change display means to be executed, the game ball entering the second start area, and the special acquisition Second determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game; and second variation display means for performing variation display of the second symbol in any of a plurality of variation times based on the determination result by the second determination means. If, when the variable display of the first symbol is the first special result A first special game execution means for executing a first special game that opened the special winning opening from the closed state, the variable display of the second symbol is a second special result, disadvantageous than the first special game And a second special game executing means for executing a second special game for changing the prize winning opening from the closed state to the open state in a mode, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the first special game is completed. A game state control means that can be controlled, a prize ball grant means for giving a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls by entering the grand prize opening, an effect control means for controlling effects related to the game, The variation display of the first symbol by the first variation display means and the variation display of the second symbol by the second variation display means can be executed in parallel , the first variation display means, The second where the second special game is executed When the special symbol is not displayed during the variation display of the design, the variation display of the first symbol is started, and when the variation display of the second symbol is stopped during the variation display of the first symbol, Even if the variation time of the symbol has not elapsed, the variation display of the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means displays numerical information on the display means during the first special game, and the prize winning opening When the game ball enters, the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball is added to the numerical information and displayed, and the numerical information is continuously displayed even in the specific gaming state after the end of the first special game. When a game ball enters the big winning opening during the second special game executed while the numerical information is continuously displayed, the number of winning balls corresponding to the entered ball is stored in the numerical information. It is characterized by an addition display .

Claims (1)

First acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the first start area;
First determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the first acquisition means;
First fluctuation display means for executing fluctuation display of the first symbol in any of a plurality of fluctuation times based on the determination result by the first determination means;
Second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on a game ball entering the second start area;
Second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information acquired by the second acquisition means;
Second fluctuation display means for executing fluctuation display of the second symbol at any of a plurality of fluctuation times based on the determination result by the second determination means;
Special game execution means for executing the special game when the variable display of the first symbol or the variable symbol of the second symbol is a special result,
The variation display of the first symbol by the first variation display means and the variation display of the second symbol by the second variation display means can be executed in parallel,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game which is more disadvantageous than the first special game.
The first variation display means starts the variation display of the first symbol in which the special game is not executed during the variation display of the second symbol in which the second special game is executed, and displays the variation display of the first symbol. When the second symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed even if the first symbol variation time has not elapsed.

Images